Canon DC22 Camcorder User Manual

User Guide
ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520
Notes: Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the following:
• Safety and Warranty Guide
• Regulatory Notice
•
“Important safety information” on page vi
• Appendix C “Notices” on page 273
The Safety and Warranty Guide and the Regulatory Notice have been uploaded on the Web site. To refer to
them, go to http://support.lenovo.com and click User Guides & Manuals. Then follow the instructions on
the screen.
Second Edition (October 2011)
© Copyright Lenovo 2011.
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration
“GSA” contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.
Contents
Read this first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . vi
Conditions that require immediate action . .
vii
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Chapter 1. Product Overview . . . . . . 1
Locating computer controls, connectors, and
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front view. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right-side view. . . . . . . . . . .
Left-side view . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom view . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Locating important product information . . .
Machine type and model label . . . . .
FCC ID and IC Certification number label
Certificate of Authenticity label . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment . . . . . . . . .
ThinkVantage Technologies and software . .
Accessing applications in Windows 7 . .
Access Connections . . . . . . . .
Active Protection System . . . . . . .
Client Security Solution . . . . . . .
Color Sensor Utility . . . . . . . . .
Fingerprint Software. . . . . . . . .
Lenovo Solution Center . . . . . . .
Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools . . . . . .
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox . . . . .
Message Center Plus . . . . . . . .
Password Manager . . . . . . . . .
Power Manager . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery Media . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation Director . . . . . . . .
Rescue and Recovery . . . . . . . .
SimpleTap . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Update . . . . . . . . . .
ThinkVantage GPS . . . . . . . . .
ThinkVantage Productivity Center . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2. Using your computer . . .
Register your computer . .
Frequently asked questions
Special keys and buttons .
ThinkVantage button .
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
6
8
10
12
14
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
31
31
Numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function key combinations . . . . . . . .
Volume and mute buttons . . . . . . . .
Windows key and Application key . . . . .
Using the UltraNav pointing device. . . . . . .
Using the TrackPoint pointing device . . . .
Using the touch pad. . . . . . . . . . .
Behavior of the UltraNav and an external
mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray .
Touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power management . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery status . . . . . . . . .
Using the ac power adapter. . . . . . . .
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . .
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . .
Managing your battery power . . . . . . .
Power-saving modes . . . . . . . . . .
Handling the battery. . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet connections . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless connections . . . . . . . . . .
Using the built-in modem. . . . . . . . .
Presentations and multimedia. . . . . . . . .
Changing display settings . . . . . . . .
Connecting a projector or external display . .
Setting up a presentation. . . . . . . . .
Using dual displays . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the NVIDIA Optimus Graphics feature . . .
Using a color profile . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using audio features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an integrated camera . . . . . . . . .
Using the ThinkLight feature . . . . . . . . .
Using the optical drive . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the media card reader . . . . . . . . .
Inserting an ExpressCard, a flash media card,
or a smart card. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing an ExpressCard, a flash media
card, or a smart card . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. You and your computer . .
Accessibility and comfort . . . . .
Ergonomic information. . . . .
Adjusting your computer to fit you
Accessibility information . . . .
FullScreen Magnifier function . .
Traveling with your computer . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32
33
36
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
44
44
44
45
45
45
45
47
49
49
49
57
77
77
78
82
83
84
85
85
86
87
87
87
88
89
91
91
91
92
93
93
94
i
Travel tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel accessories . . . . . . . . . . .
94
94
Chapter 4. Security . . . . . . . . . .
97
Attaching a mechanical lock . . . . . . . . .
Using passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passwords and sleep (standby) mode . . . .
Typing passwords . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on password . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard disk passwords . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor password . . . . . . . . . .
Hard disk security . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the security chip . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a fingerprint reader . . . . . . . . . .
Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive
or solid state drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using and understanding firewalls . . . . . . .
Protecting data against viruses . . . . . . . .
97
97
98
98
98
99
101
103
104
105
Chapter 5. Recovery overview . . .
Creating and using recovery media . . . . .
Creating recovery media . . . . . . . .
Using recovery media . . . . . . . . .
Performing backup and recovery operations . .
Performing a backup operation . . . . .
Performing a recovery operation . . . . .
Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace . .
Creating and using a rescue medium . . . . .
Creating a rescue medium . . . . . . .
Using a rescue medium . . . . . . . .
Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device
drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving recovery problems . . . . . . . . .
111
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
111
112
112
113
113
113
114
115
115
116
.
.
116
117
Chapter 6. Replacing devices . . . .
Static electricity prevention . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the backup battery . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the hard disk drive . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing memory (T520 and T520i) . . . .
Increasing or replacing memory (W520) . . .
Installing and replacing the mSATA solid state
drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card
for wireless LAN/WiMAX connection . . . . . .
Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card
for wireless WAN connection . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the solid state drive . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Ultrabay device . . . . . . . .
ii
User Guide
109
109
109
119
119
119
124
126
130
135
135
139
148
151
160
164
166
170
Chapter 7. Enhancing your
computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding ThinkPad options . . . . . . . . . .
Using the serial Ultrabay enhanced . . . . . .
Performing a hot swap . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a warm swap . . . . . . . . .
Inserting the hard disk drive into the
adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting the hard disk drive adapter into the
bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini
Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3,
and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) . .
Front view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3,
ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock
Plus Series 3 (170 W) . . . . . . . . . .
Detaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series
3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) . . . . . . . .
Security feature . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the system lock key . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8. Advanced
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new operating system . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Windows Vista . . . . . . . . .
Installing Windows XP . . . . . . . . . .
Installing device drivers . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the driver for 4-in-1 media card
reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the driver for USB 3.0 . . . . . .
Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows
2000/XP/Vista/7 . . . . . . . . . . . .
ThinkPad Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Config menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and time menu. . . . . . . . . . .
Security menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Startup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ThinkPad Setup items . . . . . . . . . .
Updating your system UEFI BIOS . . . . .
Using system management. . . . . . . . . .
System management . . . . . . . . . .
Setting management features . . . . . . .
Chapter 9. Preventing problems . .
General tips for preventing problems . . . . . .
171
171
171
171
172
174
176
177
178
181
185
188
190
192
193
193
193
194
195
196
199
199
199
199
201
202
203
203
204
206
206
216
217
217
218
221
221
Making sure device drivers are current . . . .
Getting the latest drivers from the Web site .
Getting the latest drivers using System
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking care of your computer . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the cover of your computer . . .
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting
computer problems . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing problems . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . .
Computer stops responding . . .
Spills on the keyboard . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . .
Errors without messages . . . . .
Beep errors . . . . . . . . . .
Memory problems . . . . . . .
Modem and networking . . . . .
Keyboard and other pointing devices
Display and multimedia devices . .
Fingerprint reader problems. . . .
Battery and power . . . . . . .
Drives and other storage devices .
Software problems . . . . . . .
Ports and connectors . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
222
222
225
227
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 11. Getting support . . . .
Before you contact Lenovo . .
Register your computer .
Download system updates
Record information . . .
Getting help and service . . .
Using diagnostic programs
Lenovo Support Web site.
Calling Lenovo . . . . .
Purchasing additional services
222
222
227
228
228
229
229
231
232
233
233
240
241
251
251
255
257
257
259
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
259
259
259
259
260
260
260
260
261
Appendix A. Regulatory
information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless related information . . . . . . . . .
Location of the UltraConnect wireless
antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating wireless regulatory notices . . . .
Export classification notice . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic emission notices. . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . .
Industry Canada Class B emission compliance
statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European Union - Compliance to the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . .
German Class B compliance statement . . .
Korea Class B compliance statement . . . .
Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement . .
Japan compliance statement for products
which connect to the power mains with
rated current less than or equal to 20 A per
phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lenovo product service information for
Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix B. WEEE and recycling
statements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EU WEEE statements . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recycling information for Japan . . . . .
Battery recycling information for Brazil . . . . .
Battery recycling information for Taiwan . . . . .
Battery recycling information for European
Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recycling information for United States and
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C. Notices. . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
263
264
265
265
265
266
266
266
267
267
267
267
268
269
269
269
270
270
271
271
273
274
iii
iv
User Guide
Read this first
Be sure to follow the important tips given here to continue to get the most use and enjoyment out of your
computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause your computer to fail.
When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm
rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach
depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery.
Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause
discomfort or even a skin burn.
• Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in
contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time.
• Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from
the palm rest.
Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter.
When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your
computer, it generates heat.
Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin
burn.
• Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body
while it is in use.
• Never use it to warm your body.
Prevent your computer from getting wet.
• To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from
your computer.
Protect the cables from being damaged.
Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them.
• Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a
keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be
walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in
any way subjected to treatment that could interfere with the operation of
your computer.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
v
Protect your computer and data when moving it.
Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive, do one of the
following, and make sure that the power switch is off or is blinking:
• Turn it off.
• Press Fn+F4 to put it in sleep (standby) mode
• Press Fn+F12 to put it in hibernation mode.
This will help to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data.
Handle your computer gently.
• Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on
your computer, display, or external devices.
Carry your computer carefully.
• Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection.
• Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag.
• Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep
(standby) mode (Fn+F4), or in hibernation mode (Fn+F12). Do not put a computer
in a carrying case while it is turned on.
Important safety information
Note: Read important safety information first.
This information can help you safely use your notebook personal computer. Follow and retain all information
included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase
agreement or the Lenovo® Limited Warranty. For more information, see “Warranty Information” in the Safety
and Warranty Guide comes with your computer.
Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal
computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential
safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these
risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following
the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself
from hazards and create a safer computer work environment.
Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition to notebook
computers, some products (such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have
such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized
internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the
battery safety information applies to all computer products.
vi
User Guide
Conditions that require immediate action
Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough
that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by
an authorized servicer.
As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare
occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you
might hear sounds like popping, cracking or hissing. These conditions might merely mean that an
internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate
a potential safety issue. However, do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself.
Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone
numbers, see the following Web site:
http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone
Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you
have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer
Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and
have it repaired, if necessary.
In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns
with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication
lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance.
• Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are
cracked, broken, or damaged.
• Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire.
• Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign
substances on the battery.
• A cracking, hissing or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product.
• Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord or
power adapter.
• The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water.
• The product has been dropped or damaged in any way.
• The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions.
Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for
or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions,
or until you get a suitable replacement.
Safety guidelines
Always observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury and property damage.
For more information, see “Important safety information” in the Safety and Warranty Guide comes with your
computer.
Service and upgrades
Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or
your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product.
Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are
referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
vii
Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for
customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or
replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a
product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always make
sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. For more
information on CRUs, refer to Chapter 6 “Replacing devices” on page 119 for this product. If you have any
questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center.
Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the
following warnings are required for your safety.
CAUTION:
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.
CAUTION:
Before replacing any CRUs, turn off the computer and wait three to five minutes to let the computer
cool before opening the cover.
viii
User Guide
Power cords and power adapters
DANGER
Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer.
The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or
better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly.
Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in
ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard.
Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects.
Protect power cord and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or
power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids
can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by
misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector
terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating.
Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord
connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles.
Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the AC input pins or shows signs of
overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the AC input or anywhere on the power adapter.
Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or
overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way.
Extension cords and related devices
Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use
are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips
are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information
if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
ix
Plugs and outlets
DANGER
If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be
damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician.
Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain
a replacement.
Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts
of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices.
Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded
electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into
a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an
approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never
overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch
circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads
and branch circuit ratings.
Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close
to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords.
Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are
installing.
Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet.
Power supply statement
DANGER
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with
one of these parts, contact a service technician.
External devices
CAUTION:
Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and
1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid
possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to
disconnect external devices.
x
User Guide
Batteries
DANGER
Personal computers manufactured by Lenovo contain a coin cell battery to provide power to
the system clock. In addition, many mobile products, such as notebook computers, utilize a
rechargeable battery pack to provide system power when in portable mode. Batteries supplied by
Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced
with approved parts.
This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The
system will continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries. Attention: Lenovo has no
responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and provides no warranties
for failures or damage arising out of their use.
Never attempt to open or service any battery. Do not crush, puncture, or incinerate batteries or
short circuit the metal contacts. Do not expose the battery to water or other liquids. Only recharge
the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation.
Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame
to “vent” from the battery pack or coin cell. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any
discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the
battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer.
Batteries can degrade when they are left unused for long periods of time. For some rechargeable
batteries (particularly Lithium Ion batteries), leaving a battery unused in a discharged state could
increase the risk of a battery short circuit, which could shorten the life of the battery and can also
pose a safety hazard. Do not let rechargeable Lithium-Ion batteries completely discharge or store
these batteries in a discharged state.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
xi
Rechargeable battery notice
DANGER
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery pack. Attempting to do so can cause an
explosion, or liquid leakage from the battery pack. A battery pack other than the one specified by
Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery pack is not covered by the warranty.
If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery
pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:
• Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Do not expose it to water or rain.
• Do not attempt to disassemble it.
• Do not short-circuit it.
• Keep it away from children.
• Do not drop the battery pack.
Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery,
comply with local ordinances or regulations.
The battery pack should be stored at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50%
of capacity. We recommend that battery pack be charged about once per year to prevent
overdischarge.
Lithium coin cell battery notice
DANGER
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
When replacing the lithium coin cell battery, use only the same or an equivalent type that is
recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly
used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
• Throw or immerse into water
• Heat to more than 100°C (212°F).
• Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A.
California Perchlorate Information:
Products containing CR (manganese dioxide) lithium coin cell batteries may contain perchlorate.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. Go to:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
xii
User Guide
Heat and product ventilation
DANGER
Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when
batteries are charging. notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their
compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:
• When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some
other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your
body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you
use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time.
Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on
the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body,
even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks
from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use
the keyboard for any extended length of time.
• Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive
environments.
• Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and
reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on
a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features.
• When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates
heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the
ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing,
may cause a skin burn.
For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:
• Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in.
• Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation.
• Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be
required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas.
• Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings.
• Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating.
• Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35°C (95°F).
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
xiii
Electrical current safety information
DANGER
Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
• Do not use your computer during a lightning storm.
• Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration
of this product during an electrical storm.
• Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.
• Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product.
• Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.
• Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.
• Disconnect the attached power cords, battery pack, and all the cables before you open the
device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
• Do not use you computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use
the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed.
DANGER
• Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing,
moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices.
To connect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlets.
5. Turn devices ON.
To disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, remove power cords from outlets.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other
electrical cables connected to the computer.
The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical
cables have been connected to the computer.
xiv
User Guide
Modem safety information
DANGER
For North America Type:
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger (for example, No. 24 AWG)
telecommunication line cord listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or certified by the Canadian
Standards Association (CSA).
To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury when using telephone equipment, always
follow basic safety precautions as the following:
• Do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall during a
lightning storm.
• Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations. Do not use your computer near water.
• Do not touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Do not use your computer with the telephone cable connection during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm.
• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
• Do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector.
Laser compliance statement
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are
installed, note the following:
• Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice
CAUTION:
The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break.
If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the
affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get
medical care.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
xv
Using headphones or earphones
If your computer has both a headphone connector and an audio-out connector, always use the headphone
connector for headphones (also called a headset) or earphones.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of
the equalizer to maximum increases the earphones and headphones output voltage and therefore the
sound pressure level.
Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the
output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The
headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification
limits the computer’s maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against
hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7
limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN
50332-2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels.
If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of
the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1.
If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5
Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to
excessive sound pressure levels.
Additional safety information
DANGER
Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger
of suffocation.
Notice for Tablet PC users
Safety Notice for users in Australia:
DANGER
Do not connect phone line while using tablet mode.
Notice for users in the U.S.A.
Many PC products and accessories contain cords, cables or wires, such as power cords or cords to connect
the accessory to a PC. If this product has such a cord, cable or wire, then the following warning applies:
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose
you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Save these instructions.
xvi
User Guide
Chapter 1. Product Overview
This chapter provides information about the locations of connectors, locating important product information,
computer features, specifications, operating environment, and preinstalled software programs.
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
“Locating computer controls, connectors, features, and indicators” on page 1
•
“Locating important product information” on page 17
•
“Features” on page 20
•
“Specifications” on page 21
•
“Operating environment” on page 22
•
“ThinkVantage Technologies and software” on page 22
Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators
This section introduces you to the hardware features of your computer, and then gives you the basic
information you'll need to start taking advantage of its functions.
• Front
• Right-side
• Left-side
• Rear
• Bottom
• Status indicators
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
1
Front view
Figure 1. ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520 front view
1
1 Computer display
2 Built-in microphone (right)
3 Power switch
4 PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA
solid state drive (SSD)
5 PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless LAN/WiMAX
6 Color sensor
7 Memory-upgrade slot
8 TrackPoint buttons
9 TrackPoint pointing stick
10 ThinkVantage button
11 System and power-status indicators
12 Built-in microphone (left)
13 UltraConnect wireless antenna (left)
14 Integrated camera
15 ThinkLight
16 UltraConnect wireless antenna (right)
17 Built-in stereo speaker (right)
18 Forward and Back keys
19 Fingerprint reader
20 Bluetooth antenna
21 Touch pad
22 Touch pad buttons
23 Fn key
24 Built-in stereo speaker (left)
25 CapsLock indicator
26 Volume control buttons
Computer display
The high-resolution, thin-film transistor (TFT) display provides clear and brilliant text and graphics.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Changing display settings” on page 77.
2
User Guide
2 Built-in microphone (right)
12 Built-in microphone (left)
The built-in microphone captures sound and voice when it is used with an application program capable
of handling audio.
3
Power switch
Use the power switch to turn on the computer. To turn off your computer, use the Start menu shutdown
options.
If you cannot turn off the computer by this method, press and hold the power switch for 2 seconds.
If your computer stops responding, and you cannot turn it off, press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds
or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery.
The power switch can also be programmed through Power Manager to shut down the computer or put it into
sleep (standby) or hibernation.
4
PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA solid state drive (SSD)
Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables
wireless WAN communications.
With Lenovo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems, some models are
equipped with an mSATA solid state drive for data storage.
5
PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless LAN/WiMAX
Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables
wireless LAN/WiMAX communications.
6
Color sensor
The color sensor allows you to measure and adjust the color accuracy of your displays. For details, refer to
the instructions in “Color Sensor Utility” on page 25.
7
Memory-upgrade slot
You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory
bay. Memory modules are available as options.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do
not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs. For details, refer to the instructions in “Increasing or
replacing memory (W520)” on page 139.
UltraNav®
TrackPoint® buttons
TrackPoint pointing stick
21 Touch pad
22 Touch pad buttons
8
9
The keyboard contains the unique TrackPoint pointing device. Pointing, selecting, and dragging are all part
of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from typing position.
Move your fingertip across the UltraNav touch pad to move the pointer.
The TrackPoint and touch pad buttons provide functions similar to those of a mouse and its buttons.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
3
10
ThinkVantage® button
Press the ThinkVantage button to launch the SimpleTap program (for Windows® 7) or the ThinkVantage
Productivity Center program (for Windows XP and Windows Vista®).
Note: Depending on the date when your computer was manufactured, your computer might have the
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program preinstalled instead of the SimpleTap program or the ThinkVantage
Productivity Center program.
You also can use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the
Rescue and Recovery® workspace. For more information, see “ThinkVantage button” on page 31.
11
System and power-status indicators
Your computer has the system status indicators and the power status indicators. For the detailed information
about the location and meaning of each indicator, see “System-status indicators” on page 14 and
“Power-status indicators” on page 15.
13
16
UltraConnect™ wireless antenna (left)
UltraConnect wireless antenna (right)
The built-in antennas for the wireless communication are located at the top left and the top right portions of
your computer display.
For the specific locations of each antenna, refer to “Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas” on
page 264.
14
Integrated camera
Some models have an integrated camera. By using this camera, you can take pictures or hold a video
conference.
For more information about how to use the camera, refer to “Using an integrated camera” on page 86.
15
ThinkLight®
You can use your computer under less than perfect lighting conditions.
To illuminate the keyboard, turn on the ThinkLight by pressing Fn+PgUp. To turn it off, press Fn+PgUp again.
17
24
Built-in stereo speaker (right)
Built-in stereo speaker (left)
The stereo speakers are built into your computer.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Volume and mute buttons” on page 36.
18
Forward and Back keys
The Forward and Back keys on your keyboard near the cursor-control keys are used with your Internet
browser, such as Internet Explorer®. They function like the forward and back arrows in the browser that
move you back and forward to pages you have viewed in the order that you opened them.
19
Fingerprint reader
Some models have a fingerprint reader. The fingerprint authentication technology enables you to use your
fingerprint to start the computer and enter the ThinkPad Setup.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Using a fingerprint reader” on page 105.
4
User Guide
20
Bluetooth antenna
Your computer has Integrated Bluetooth features. For more information, see “Using Bluetooth” on page 51.
23
Fn key
Use the Fn key to take advantage of ThinkPad® functions, such as turning on the ThinkLight. To use
ThinkPad functions, press Fn+ the required function key marked in blue.
25
CapsLock indicator
The indicator of CapsLock is located on the CapsLock key.
For more information about CapsLock indicator, see “System-status indicators” on page 14.
26
Volume control buttons
The built-in volume buttons enable you to quickly adjust the volume or mute the sound from your computer.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Volume and mute buttons” on page 36.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
5
Right-side view
Figure 2. ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520 right view
1
1 Security keyhole
2 Ethernet connector
3 Serial Ultrabay enhanced
4 Combo audio jack
5 ExpressCard slot
6 Media card reader slot
Security keyhole
Your computer comes with a security keyhole. You can purchase a security cable and lock to fit this keyhole.
2
Ethernet connector
Connect your computer to a LAN with the Ethernet connector.
DANGER
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector.
You can only connect an Ethernet cable to this connector.
Two indicators, to the upper right and left of the connector, show the status of the network connection.
When your computer connects to a LAN and a session with the network is available, the upper right indicator
is solid green. While data is being transmitted, the upper left indicator blinks yellow.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Access Connections” on page 24.
Note: If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series
3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) and use an Ethernet
connector, use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock
Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), not the one
on the computer.
6
User Guide
3
Serial Ultrabay™ enhanced
Your computer has a bay for Serial Ultrabay Enhanced devices. An optical drive is installed in the bay.
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
4
Combo audio jack
To listen to the sound from your computer, connect a headphone or a headset that has a 3.5mm 4-pole
plug to the combo audio jack.
Notes:
• If you are using a headset with a function switch, for example, a headset for an iPhone® mobile digital
device, do not press this switch while using the headset. If you press it, the headset microphone will
be disabled, and the internal microphone will be enabled instead.
• The combo audio jack does not support a conventional microphone. For more information about the
audio devices supported by the combo audio jack of your computer and the audio jacks of ThinkPad
Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W),
see “Using audio features” on page 85.
5
ExpressCard slot
Your computer has an ExpressCard slot for a 34 mm-wide card.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Using an ExpressCard, a smart card, or a flash media Card” on
page 87.
6
Media card reader slot
Depending on the model, your computer may have a media card reader slot. The media card reader
supports the following cards:
• SD card
• SDHC card
• SDXC card
• MultiMediaCard
Note: Your computer does not support the CPRM feature for SD card.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Using an ExpressCard, a smart card, or a flash media card” on
page 87.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
7
Left-side view
Figure 3. ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520 left view
1
1 Fan louvers (left)
2 DisplayPort connector
3 Monitor connector
4 USB connectors (left)
5 USB/eSATA combo connector
6 IEEE 1394 connector
7 Wireless radio switch
8 Smart card slot
Fan louvers (left)
The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor.
Note: To avoid impeding airflow, do not place any obstacle in front of the fan.
2
DisplayPort connector
Your computer supports the DisplayPort, a next-generation digital display interface that connects a
compatible projector, external monitor, or HDTV to your computer.
3
Monitor connector
You can attach an external monitor or a projector to your computer to display computer information.
Note: If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3,
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) and use a monitor connector,
use the monitor connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), not the one on the computer.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Attaching an external monitor” on page 78.
4
USB connectors (left)
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface,
such as a printer or a digital camera.
Notes:
8
User Guide
• Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations.
• Your computer is compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0. Some models are also compatible with USB 3.0.
• If your computer is a USB 3.0 model, any function specific to USB 3.0 will not work until your Windows
operating system has been started. However, USB 2.0 or 1.0 devices will work.
5
USB/eSATA combo connector
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface,
such as a printer or a digital camera.
Note: Your computer is compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0.
When you attach a USB cable to the connector, make sure that the mark is to the upper side. Otherwise the
connector might be damaged.
You can also connect an external SATA device, such as an external hard disk drive, to this connector
on some models.
Note: To avoid damaging the connector, be careful when you attach a cable from the external SATA device
to the connector.
6
IEEE 1394 connector
Your computer has an IEEE 1394 connector, which is used for connecting devices that are compatible with
the IEEE 1394 interface, such as digital video cameras and external hard disk drives.
7
Wireless radio switch
You can quickly turn the wireless features of your computer on and off using this switch.
8
Smart card slot
Your computer has a smart card slot.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Using an ExpressCard, a smart card, or a flash media card” on
page 87.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
9
Bottom view
Figure 4. ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520 bottom view
1 SIM card slot
2 Battery
3 Docking connector
4 Memory-upgrade slot
5 Hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive
1
SIM card slot
If your computer has a wireless WAN feature, it may require a SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) card to
establish a wireless WAN (Wide Area Network) connections. Depending on the country of delivery, the SIM
card may be already installed in the SIM card slot.
2
Battery
Use your computer with battery power whenever ac power is unavailable.
By installing a second battery, available as an option, in the serial Ultrabay enhanced, you can extend the
operating time of the computer. You can also use Power Manager to adjust your power setting as needed.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Power Manager” on page 27.
3
Docking connector
With a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3,
or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), you can extend the computer capabilities when you are in
your office or at home.
4
Memory-upgrade slot
You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory
bay. Memory modules are available as options.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do
not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs. For details, refer to the instructions in “Increasing or
replacing memory (W520)” on page 139.
10
User Guide
5
Hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive
Your computer may have a large-capacity, customer-upgradable hard disk drive that can meet a variety of
storage demands. To keep the drive safe, Active Protection System™ is installed on your computer. For
details, refer to “Active Protection System” on page 24.
If you wish, you can purchase another hard disk drive and install it in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
With Lenovo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems, some models
are equipped with a solid state drive for data storage. This cutting-edge technology enables notebook
computers to be lighter, smaller and faster.
Note: The hidden service partition is the reason why there is less free space than expected on your hard
disk drive or solid state drive. This reduction is more noticeable on the solid state drive because of its
smaller capacity.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
11
Rear view
Figure 5. ThinkPad T520, T520i, and W520 rear view
1 Always On USB connector (rear)
2 Modem connector
3 Power jack
4 Fan louvers (rear)
1
Always On USB connector (rear)
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface,
such as a printer or a digital camera.
By default, even when your computer is in sleep (standby) mode, the Always On USB connector still enables
you to charge some devices, such as iPod® and iPhone and BlackBerry® smartphones, by attaching the
devices to the connector.
However, with the ac power adapter attached, if you want to charge these devices when your computer
is in hibernation mode or powered off, you will need to open the Power Manager program and configure
corresponding settings to enable the Always On USB connector function. For details about how to enable
the Always On USB connector function, refer to the online help of the Power Manager program.
Notes:
• Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations.
• Your computer is compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0.
2
Modem connector
Connect your computer to a telephone line with the modem connector.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Dialup connections” on page 75.
3
Power jack
The ac power adapter cable connects to the computer power jack to provide power to the computer and
charge the battery.
12
User Guide
4
Fan louvers (rear)
The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor.
Note: To avoid impeding airflow, do not place any obstacle in front of the fan.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
13
Status indicators
Your computer has system-status indicators and power-status indicators. The status indicators show the
current status of your computer.
System-status indicators
1
Device Access
A hard disk drive or an optional drive, such as a drive in the Ultrabay, is being used to read or write data.
When this indicator is blinking, do not put the computer into sleep (standby) mode, remove the
device from the bay, or turn off the computer.
2
Power On
The power switch stays lit whenever the computer is on, blinks when the computer is in sleep (standby)
mode, and is off when the computer is off.
3
Caps Lock
Caps Lock mode is enabled. You can enter all alphabetic characters (A-Z) in uppercase without pressing
the Shift key.
4
Numeric lock
By default, when the numeric lock is on, the numeric lock indicator is displayed on the screen. To change the
settings of the numeric lock indicator, see “Changing display settings” on page 77.
Note: Another mode available for your computer, though there is no indicator for it, is Scroll Lock mode.
When this mode is enabled, the arrow keys can be used as function keys for screen-scrolling, but not for
moving the cursor. To enable or disable this mode, press ScrLk. Not all application programs support
this function.
14
User Guide
Power-status indicators
1
Sleep (standby in Windows XP) status
• Green: The computer is in sleep (standby) mode.
• Blinking green: The computer is entering sleep (standby) or hibernation mode, or is resuming normal
operation.
2
Battery status
• Green: The battery has more than 20% charge.
• Orange: The battery has between 5% and 20% charge
• Fast blinking orange: The battery has less than 5% charge.
Note: The battery may be charging.
• Slow blinking orange: The battery is being charged. When it reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to
green.
• Slow blinking green: The battery has between 20% and 80% charge, and charging is continuing.
When the battery reaches 80% charge, blinking stops, but the charging may continue until the battery is
100% charged.
Note: If the computer is operating on battery power, the Battery status indicator does not work while the
computer is turned off or is in sleep (standby) mode or hibernation mode.
• Quick blinking orange: An error has been occurred in the battery.
• The battery status indicator is off: The battery of your computer is detached.
Some models of ThinkPad W520 notebooks are shipped with a color sensor.
3
Color sensor status
• Green: Calibration is complete. When the lid is opened, the indicator turns off.
• Blinking green: Display colors are being calibrated.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
15
4
Bluetooth status
• Green: The feature is on, and the radio link is ready for use, or the data is being transmitted.
• Off: The Bluetooth feature is disabled.
5
Wireless LAN/Wireless WAN/WiMAX status
• Green: The wireless LAN feature (the 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g or 802.11n draft 2.0), wireless
WAN feature or WiMAX feature is on, and the radio link is ready for use, or the data is being transmitted.
• Off: Wireless network devices are disabled or the radio is turned off.
16
User Guide
Locating important product information
This section provides information to help you locate your machine type and model label, FCC ID and IC
Certification label, and Windows Certificate of Authenticity.
Machine type and model label
The machine type and model label identifies your computer. If you contact Lenovo for help, the machine
type and model number will help support technicians to identify your computer and provide the highest
level of service.
You can find the machine type and model of your computer in the label as shown below:
Chapter 1. Product Overview
17
FCC ID and IC Certification number label
There is no FCC ID or IC Certification number for the PCI Express Mini Card shown on the enclosure of
your computer. The FCC ID and IC Certification number label is affixed on the card installed in the PCI
Express Mini Card slot of your computer.
If no integrated wireless PCI Express Mini Card has been preinstalled in your computer, you can install
one. To do this, follow the procedure in “Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless
LAN/WiMAX connection” on page 151 or “Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless
WAN connection” on page 160.
18
User Guide
Certificate of Authenticity label
The Microsoft® Certificate of Authenticity label for the preinstalled operating system is attached. Printed on
this label are the product ID and the product key information for your computer. Record this information
and keep it in a safe place. You might need these numbers to start your computer or reinstall the operating
system.
The Windows Certificate of Authenticity of your computer is shown as below:
Chapter 1. Product Overview
19
Features
Features
Processor
• See the system properties of your computer. You can do this as follows: Click Start, right-click Computer
(in Windows XP, My Computer); then from the pull down menu select Properties.
Memory
• Double data rate 3 (DDR3) synchronous dynamic random access memory
– ThinkPad T520: 2 slots
– ThinkPad T520i: 2 slots
– ThinkPad W520: 4 slots
Note: For ThinkPad W520 with dual-core processor models, two of the four slots are preinstalled
with Dummy DIMM cards. For details, refer to the instructions in “Increasing or replacing memory
(W520)” on page 139.
Storage device
• 2.5-inch (7 mm height or 9.5 mm height) hard disk drive
• 2.5-inch (7 mm height) solid state drive
• mSATA solid state drive (on some models)
Display
The color display uses TFT technology:
• Size: 15.6 inch (396 mm)
• Resolution:
– LCD: 1920-by-1080, 1600-by-900, 1366-by-768
– External monitor: Up to 2560-by-1600
• Brightness control
• ThinkLight
• Integrated camera (on some models)
• Color sensor (on some models)
• Built-in microphones (on some models)
• Multi-touch panel (on some models)
Keyboard
• 89-key
• UltraNav (TrackPoint and multi-touch touch pad)
• Fn key function
• ThinkVantage button
• Volume control buttons
• Speaker mute button
• Microphone mute button
20
User Guide
Interface
• External monitor connectors (CRT and DisplayPort)
• Combo audio jack (stereo headphone or headset)
• 3 or 4 Universal Serial Bus connectors (USB 3.0 supported on some models)
• 1 Universal Serial Bus/eSATA connector (on some models)
• 1 Always On USB connector (on some models)
• IEEE 1394 connector
• RJ11 Modem connector (on some models)
• RJ45 Ethernet connector
• Serial Ultrabay enhanced
• 1 ExpressCard (34 mm) slot
• 4-in-1 digital media card reader
• Smart card reader (on some models)
• Docking connector
Optical drive
• Multi-Burner
Wireless features
• Integrated wireless LAN
• Integrated Bluetooth (on some models)
• Integrated wireless WAN (on some models)
• Integrated WiMAX (on some models)
Security features
• Fingerprint reader (on some models)
Specifications
This section lists the physical specifications for your computer.
Size
• Width: 372.8 mm (14.68 inch)
• Depth: 245.1 mm (9.65 inch)
• Height:
31.8 to 35.6 mm (1.25 inch to 1.40 inch)
34.1 to 39.6 mm (1.34 inch to 1.56 inch) for multitouch panel models
Heat output
• 65 W (222 Btu/hr) maximum, 90 W (307 Btu/hr) maximum, 135 W (460 Btu/hr) maximum, or 170 W
(580 Btu/hr) maximum (depending on the model)
Power source (ac power adapter)
• Sine-wave input at 50 to 60 Hz
Chapter 1. Product Overview
21
• Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 to 240 V ac, 50 to 60 Hz
Battery pack
• Lithium-ion (Li-Ion) battery pack
Battery life
• For percentage of remaining battery power, see the Power Manager Battery Gauge in the task bar.
• The Power Manager also displays a green, yellow and red indication. A battery under warranty with a red
indication is eligible for a warranty replacement.
Operating environment
This section provides information about your computer operating environment.
Environment
• Maximum altitude without pressurization: 3048 m (10,000 ft)
• Temperature
– At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft)
– Operating: 5.0°C to 35.0°C (41°F to 95°F)
– Storage: 5.0°C to 43.0°C (41°F to 109°F)
– At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized
condition: 31.3°C (88°F)
Note: When you charge the battery pack, its temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F).
• Relative humidity:
– Operating: 8% to 80%
– Storage: 5% to 95%
If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine.
Keep electrical appliances such as an electric fan, radio, high-powered speakers, air conditioner, and
microwave oven away from your computer because the strong magnetic fields generated by these
appliances can damage the monitor and data on the hard disk drive or solid state drive.
Do not place any beverages on top of or beside the computer or other attached devices. If liquid is spilled on
or in the computer or an attached device, a short circuit or other damage might occur.
Do not eat or smoke over your keyboard. Particles that fall into your keyboard can cause damage.
ThinkVantage Technologies and software
Lenovo preinstalls on your PC useful and helpful software applications to help you get started, to stay
productive while on the move and to keep you and your computer working. Lenovo offers enhanced security,
wireless computing, data-migration and other solutions for your computer.
Note: To learn more about ThinkVantage Technologies and other computing solutions offered by Lenovo, go
to:
http://support.lenovo.com
22
User Guide
Accessing applications in Windows 7
If you are using the Windows 7 operating system, you can access applications by following one of the
methods below:
• You can get the applications from the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools.
Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools. Then depending on the application you
want to access, double-click the corresponding icon.
Note: If an application icon in the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools application navigation window is dimmed, it
indicates that you need to install the application manually. To install the application manually, double-click
the application icon. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. When the installation process completes,
the application icon will be activated.
Table 1. Applications on Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools
Application
Icon name
Access Connections
Internet Connection
Active Protection System
Airbag Protection
Fingerprint Software
Fingerprint Reader
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox
or
Lenovo Solution Center
System Health and Diagnostics
Mobile Broadband Activate
3G Mobile Broadband
Password Manager
Password Vault
Power Manager
Power Controls
Recovery Media
Factory Recovery Disks
Rescue and Recovery
Enhanced Backup and Restore
SimpleTap
SimpleTap
System Update
Update and Drivers
ThinkVantage GPS
GPS
• You can also get the applications from the Control Panel.
Click Start ➙ Control Panel. Depending on the application you want to access, click the corresponding
section and then click the corresponding green text.
Note: If you do not find the application you need in Control Panel, open the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools
application navigation window and double-click the dimmed icon to install the application you need.
Then, follow the instructions on the screen. When the installation process completes, the application icon
will be activated, and you can find the application in Control Panel.
The sections in Control Panel, the green texts, and the applications are listed in the following table.
Table 2. Applications on Control Panel
Application
Control Panel section
Green text on the Control Panel
Access Connections
Network and Internet
Lenovo - Internet Connection
Active Protection System
System and Security
Lenovo - Airbag Protection
Hardware and Sound
Communications Utility
Hardware and Sound
Lenovo - Communications Utility
Chapter 1. Product Overview
23
Table 2. Applications on Control Panel (continued)
Application
Fingerprint Software
Control Panel section
Green text on the Control Panel
System and Security
Lenovo - Fingerprint Reader
Hardware and Sound
or
Lenovo - Notebook Fingerprint
Reader
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox
or
Lenovo Solution Center
System and Security
Lenovo - System Health and
Diagnostics
Mobile Broadband Activate
Network and Internet
Lenovo - 3G Mobile Broadband
Password Manager
System and Security
Lenovo - Password Vault
User Accounts and Family Safety
Power Manager
Hardware and Sound
Lenovo - Power Controls
System and Security
Recovery Media
System and Security
Lenovo - Factory Recovery Disks
Rescue and Recovery
System and Security
Lenovo - Enhanced Backup and
Restore
SimpleTap
Programs
Lenovo’s SimpleTap
System Update
System and Security
Lenovo - Update and Drivers
ThinkVantage GPS
Network and Internet
Lenovo - GPS
System and Security
Access Connections
Access Connections™ is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles. Each
location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network
infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office.
By switching between location profiles as you move your computer from place to place, you can quickly and
easily connect to a network with no need to reconfigure your settings manually and restart the computer
each time.
To open the Access Connections program, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Access
Connections.
Active Protection System
The Active Protection System protects your hard disk drive when the shock sensor inside your computer
detects a condition that could damage the drive, such as system tilt, excessive vibration, or shock. The hard
disk drive is less vulnerable to damage when it is not operating; so the system stops it from spinning, and
may also move the read/write heads of the drive to areas that do not contain data. As soon as the shock
sensor senses that the environment is stable again (minimal change in system tilt, vibration, or shock), it
turns the hard disk drive on.
To open Active Protection System, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
24
User Guide
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Active Protection
System.
Client Security Solution
The Client Security Solution helps protect your computer and your personal information so that you know that
your sensitive data is secure. It can also help manage your passwords, help recover a forgotten password,
or help you monitor security settings on your computer and suggest how to enhance your computer security.
These convenient features are made more secure by a built-in security chip, a powerful computer chip
dedicated to the security functions of your computer.
To start the Client Security Solution, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Client Security
Solution.
For details, refer to the Help for the program.
You can download the latest Client Security Solution from the following Web site:
http://support.lenovo.com
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it.
Color Sensor Utility
If your computer comes with a color sensor, a preinstalled color sensor utility enables you to measure and
adjust the color accuracy of your displays.
To start the color sensor utility, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ X-Rite ➙ Color Calibrator ➙ PANTONE
Color Calibrator. The initial screen is displayed.
To start the calibration process, click Next and close the LCD. The indicator on the outer lid and short beep
sounds of the computer will show the progress, and the beeping sound will signal that the calibration
has been started or completed.
Note: If your computer has been attached to an external monitor, select one of your displays, then click
Next and close the LCD.
Fingerprint Software
If your system comes with a fingerprint reader, the Fingerprint Software program enables you to enroll your
fingerprint and associate it with your Windows password. As a result, the fingerprint authentication can
replace your password and enable simple and secure user access.
To open the fingerprint software, do the following:
• Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ ThinkVantage
Fingerprint Software.
Lenovo Solution Center
Note: Depending on the date when your computer was manufactured, your computer is preinstalled with
either the Lenovo Solution Center program or the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program for diagnostic
purposes. For additional information about the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program, see “Lenovo
ThinkVantage Toolbox” on page 26.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
25
The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It
combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along
with hints and tips for maximum system performance. For detailed information, see “Diagnosing problems”
on page 227.
To start the Lenovo Solution Center program in Windows 7, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7”
on page 23.
Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools
The Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools program helps you work more easily and securely by providing easy access
to various technologies, such as:
• Lenovo Solution Center or Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox (depending on the date of manufacture)
• Power Manager
• Rescue and Recovery
• System Update
To access the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools program, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo ThinkVantage
Tools.
Note: Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools is available only on models preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating
system. If your Windows 7 model is not preinstalled with the program, you can download it from
http://support.lenovo.com.
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox
Note: Depending on the date when your computer was manufactured, your computer is preinstalled with
either the Lenovo Solution Center program or the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program for diagnostic
purposes. For additional information about the Lenovo Solution Center program, see “Lenovo Solution
Center” on page 25.
The Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program enables you to view symptoms of computer problems and find
solutions for them. It also includes automatic notification when action is required, computing assistance,
advanced diagnostics, and diagnostic history.
To start the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Lenovo
ThinkVantage Toolbox.
For additional information about the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program, refer to the help information
system of the program.
Message Center Plus
The Message Center Plus displays messages to inform you about helpful software that has been preinstalled
on your computer. The software enables you to manage wired and wireless connections, protect your data
in the event of a problem and automatically diagnose and resolve potential problems with your computer.
The Message Center Plus can also provide messages about new updates available to keep your computer
current.
26
User Guide
Password Manager
The Password Manager program enables users to manage and remember all their sensitive and
easy-to-forget application and Web site login information, such as user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
To open Password Manager, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Password
Manager.
Power Manager
The Power Manager program provides convenient, flexible, and complete power management for your
computer. By using the Power Manager program, you can adjust your power settings to give you the best
balance between performance and power saving.
To open Power Manager, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Power Manager.
Recovery Media
This program enables you to create recovery media to restore the contents of the system drive or hard disk
drive to the same state as when the computer was originally shipped from the factory.
For information about how to open and use this program, refer to “Creating and using recovery media” on
page 111.
Presentation Director
Presentation Director is a display configuration utility that enables you to give presentations conveniently. It
also enables you to create and manage the display schemes. However, by default, Presentation Director has
some predefined presentation schemes. You can apply them to your presentation with no need to set up a
new scheme. To apply a presentation scheme, you can also use the Fn + F7 key combination.
To open Presentation Director, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Presentation Director.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, Presentation Director is not supported because the Windows
7 operating system handles the external displays instead.
Rescue and Recovery
The Rescue and Recovery program is a one button recovery and restore solution that includes a set of
self-recovery tools to help you diagnose computer problems, get help, and recover from system crashes,
even if you cannot start the Windows operating system.
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Rescue and
Recovery.
Chapter 1. Product Overview
27
SimpleTap
The SimpleTap program provides you with a quick way to customize some basic computer settings such as
muting the speakers, adjusting the volume, locking the computer operating system, launching a program,
opening a Web page, opening a file, and so on.
To start the SimpleTap program, do any of the following:
• Click the SimpleTap icon on the desktop.
• Double-tap on the touch pad using two fingers.
• Press the blue ThinkVantage button.
Note: The SimpleTap program is only available on certain models preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating
system. If your Windows 7 model is not preinstalled with the SimpleTap program, you can download it
from http://support.lenovo.com.
System Update
The System Update program helps you keep the software on your computer up-to-date by downloading and
installing software packages (ThinkVantage applications, device drivers, UEFI BIOS updates, and other third
party applications). Some examples of software that you should keep updated are programs provided by
Lenovo, such as the Rescue and Recovery program.
To open the System Update, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ System Update.
ThinkVantage GPS
If the PCI Express Mini Card installed in your computer supports GPS, your computer can receive signals
from GPS satellites and determine its location. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can find
your location on a real-time map provided by Google Maps or Microsoft Bing™ Maps.
To open ThinkVantage GPS, do the following:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ ThinkVantage GPS.
ThinkVantage Productivity Center
The ThinkVantage Productivity Center program provides an integrated user interface to help you set up,
understand, and enhance your computer. It enables you to access other ThinkVantage Technologies, view
messages from Lenovo, and perform the most frequently used tasks such as device configuration, wireless
network configuration, and computer management and maintenance.
To open the ThinkVantage Productivity Center program in Windows XP or Windows Vista, press the blue
ThinkVantage button.
Note: The ThinkVantage Productivity Center program is available on models preinstalled with the Windows
XP or Windows Vista operating system.
28
User Guide
Chapter 2. Using your computer
Your computer is powerful and is loaded with features and applications. Use it to accomplish anything,
any day, any time.
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
“Register your computer” on page 29
•
“Frequently asked questions” on page 29
•
“Special keys and buttons” on page 31
•
“Using the UltraNav pointing device” on page 39
•
“Power management” on page 44
•
“Connecting to the network” on page 49
•
“Presentations and multimedia” on page 77
•
“Using the NVIDIA Optimus Graphics feature” on page 84
•
“Using a color profile” on page 85
•
“Using audio features” on page 85
•
“Using an integrated camera” on page 86
•
“Using the ThinkLight feature” on page 87
•
“Using the optical drive” on page 87
•
“Using the media card reader” on page 87
Register your computer
When you register your computer, information is entered into a database, which enables Lenovo to contact
you in case of a recall or other severe problem. In addition, some locations offer extended privileges and
services to registered users.
When you register your computer with Lenovo, you will also receive the following benefits:
• Quicker service when you call Lenovo for help
• Automatic notification of free software and special promotional offers
Note: When you are ready to register by modem, you will need a phone connection to your computer and
access to the World Wide Web.
To register your computer with Lenovo, go to this Web site:
http://www.lenovo.com/register
Then follow the instructions on the screen.
Frequently asked questions
Here are a few tips that will help you optimize the use of ThinkPad notebook.
To ensure that you receive the best performance from your computer, browse the following Web page to find
information such as aids for troubleshooting and answers to frequently asked questions:
http://www.lenovo.com/support/faq.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
29
Can I get my user guide in another language?
• To download the user guide in another language, go to http://support.lenovo.com. Then follow the
instructions on the screen.
On the go and need to use battery power more effectively?
• To conserve power, or to suspend operation without exiting applications or saving files, see “Power-saving
modes” on page 45.
• To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving, create and apply power plans (in
Windows XP, power schemes) by use of Power Manager.
• If your computer will be turned off for an extended period of time, you can prevent battery power from
draining by removing the battery. Look for more information about using the battery in Power management.
Concerned about security or need to securely dispose of data stored on your hard disk or solid
state drive?
• Study the Security section to find out how you can protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
• The Client Security Solution preinstalled on your computer performs many of the security tasks that help
protect it. If the setup wizard runs, to keep your secure, be sure to set up the Client Security Solution.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it.
• Before you dispose of the data on the hard disk drive or the solid state drive, be sure to read “Notice on
deleting data from your hard disk or solid state drive” on page 109.
Getting connected in different locations is a challenge?
• To troubleshoot a wireless networking issue, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/support/faq
• Take advantage of the networking features by use of Access Connections.
• To learn more about using the wireless features of your computer, refer to “Wireless connections” on
page 49.
• If your computer has a modem, see “Using the built-in modem” on page 57.
• To travel more confidently, be sure to check the tips in “Traveling with your computer” on page 94.
• Press Fn+F5, or use the wireless radio switch to enable or disable the wireless features.
Need to give presentations or attach an external monitor often?
• Use Presentation Director to set up a presentation.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, it does not support Presentation Director, however the
Fn+F7 key combination may still be used to switch display output location.
• Make sure that you follow the procedure in “Attaching an external monitor” on page 78.
• With the Extend desktop function, you can display output on both the computer display and the external
monitor.
Need to attach or replace a device?
• See Chapter 6 “Replacing devices” on page 119 for more information about replacing the devices of
your computer.
• See Chapter 7 “Enhancing your computer” on page 171 for more information about enhancing the
features of your computer.
You've been using your computer for some time already, and it is getting slower?
30
User Guide
• Follow the “General tips for preventing problems” on page 221.
• You can diagnose problems yourself by using the preinstalled software. See “Diagnosing problems” on
page 227.
• Also recovery tool is provided on your computer hard disk or solid state drive. For more information,
see Chapter 5 “Recovery overview” on page 111.
Print the following sections and keep them with your computer in case you are unable to access this
online help when necessary.
•
“Installing a new operating system” on page 193
•
“Computer stops responding” on page 228
•
“Power problems” on page 252
Special keys and buttons
Your computer has several special keys and buttons.
ThinkVantage button
The blue ThinkVantage button can help you in many situations when your computer is working normally,
and even when it is not.
When your computer is working normally, press the blue ThinkVantage button to launch the SimpleTap
program (for Windows 7) or the ThinkVantage Productivity Center program (for Windows XP and Windows
Vista).
Note: Depending on the date when your computer was manufactured, your computer might have the
Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program preinstalled instead of the SimpleTap program or the ThinkVantage
Productivity Center program.
You also can use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the
Rescue and Recovery workspace, which runs independently of the Windows operating system and is hidden
Chapter 2. Using your computer
31
from it. If the Windows operating system is not running properly, the Rescue and Recovery workspace
can help you do the following:
• Get the current system information.
• Rescue a file from your Windows environment or restore back-up files, provided you have made backups
by use of the Rescue and Recovery program.
• Configure your computer or start the ThinkPad Setup.
To access the Rescue and Recovery workspace, turn on the computer; then, while the “To interrupt normal
startup, press the blue ThinkVantage button” message is displayed at the lower-left of the screen, press the
ThinkVantage button. The Rescue and Recovery screen opens. For additional information, see “Using the
Rescue and Recovery workspace” on page 114.
Numeric keypad
The keyboard has keys that, when enabled, work as a 10-key numeric keypad.
To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press and hold Shift or Fn and then press NmLk (ScrLk).
Note: The next drawing shows the locations of the keys that serve as the 10-key numeric keypad. The
locations of these keys are the same on every keyboard, though for computers using different languages,
different characters are printed on the keytops.
32
User Guide
If the numeric keypad is enabled, press and hold Shift to use the cursor- and screen-control keys temporarily.
Note: The functions of the cursor- and screen-control keys are not printed on the keys.
Function key combinations
By setting the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and
hold the Fn key (1); then press one of the function keys (2).
Power conservation
• Fn+F3
Select a power plan (in Windows XP, power scheme) that has been created by Power Manager, or adjust
the power level by using the slider control. When you press this combination of buttons, a panel for
selecting a power plan (in Windows XP, power scheme) or adjusting the power level appears.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
33
Note: If you have logged on with an administrator user ID in Windows XP, and you press Fn+F3, the panel
for selecting a power scheme appears. If you have logged on with another user ID in Windows XP,
and you press Fn+F3, the panel does not appear.
• Fn+F4
Put your computer in sleep (standby) mode. To return to normal operation, press the Fn key only, without
pressing a function key.
Note: If you want to use the combination to put the computer into hibernation mode or do-nothing mode
(in Windows XP, shut the computer down or show the panel for turning off the computer), change the
settings in Power Manager.
• Fn+F12
Put your computer in hibernation mode. To return to normal operation, press the power button for less
than four seconds.
Notes:
– Though the screen fades out immediately after Fn+F12 are pressed, the computer does not enter the
hibernation mode immediately. Do not move the system until the sleep (standby) status indicator stops
blinking. Moving the computer when it is entering hibernation may cause corruption of the hard drive.
– To use Fn+F3, Fn+F4, and Fn+F12 key combinations, you must have the ThinkPad PM device driver
installed on your computer.
For information on the power management function, refer to “Power management” on page 44.
Applying a presentation scheme
• Fn+F7
Apply a presentation scheme directly, with no need to start Presentation Director.
To disable this function and use the Fn+F7 key combination for switching a display output location, start
Presentation Director, and change the settings.
Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Presentation Director.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, it does not support presentation schemes, however the
Fn+F7 key combination may still be used to switch display output location.
Switching a display output location
• Fn+F7
For Windows 7:
Switch between the computer display and an external monitor. Windows will show these display options:
– Computer display only (LCD)
– Computer display and external monitor (same image)
– Computer display and external monitor (extended desktop function)
– External monitor only
Note: To switch between the computer display and an external monitor, the Win+P key combination
is also available.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP:
Switch between the computer display and an external monitor. If an external monitor is attached,
computer output is displayed in the following three patterns by turns:
– External monitor (CRT display)
34
User Guide
– Computer display and external monitor (LCD + CRT display)
– Computer display
Notes:
– This function is not supported if different desktop images are displayed on the computer display and
the external monitor (the Extend desktop function).
– This function does not work while a DVD movie or a video clip is playing.
– As for ThinkPad W520 models, the CRT connector does not work in the DOS environment at NVIDIA
Optimus mode or Integrated Graphics mode, you need to change to Discrete Graphics mode to turn on
the CRT monitor. If there is no display to change the ThinkPad Setup setting, press F7 to switch to the
Discrete Graphics mode right after power-on.
To enable this function, start Presentation Director, and change the settings.
Note: Multiple users can log on to a single operating system by using different user IDs. Each user
needs to do the following:
Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Presentation Director, and change the Fn+F7 Settings.
Enabling or disabling the wireless features
• Fn+F5
Enable or disable the built-in wireless networking features. If you press Fn+F5, a list of wireless features is
displayed. You can quickly change the power state of each feature in the list.
Notes: If you want to use Fn+F5 to enable or disable the wireless features, the following device drivers
must be installed on your computer beforehand:
– Power Management driver
– OnScreen Display Utility
– Wireless device drivers
For information on the wireless features, refer to “Wireless connections” on page 49.
Launching the camera and audio settings
• Fn+F6
If you press Fn+F6, the camera and audio settings window is opened and the camera preview is turned on.
From this window, you can change the camera and audio settings.
Note: The Camera settings area only appears if your computer has an integrated camera. For more
information, see “Using camera” on page 86.
Other functions
• Fn+PgUp: Turn the ThinkLight on. To turn it off, press Fn+PgUp again.
Note: This function is supported only on the ThinkPad notebooks that have the ThinkLight. The on or off
status of the ThinkLight is shown on the screen for a few seconds when you press Fn+PgUp.
• Fn+Home: The computer display becomes brighter.
The purpose of this method is to change the brightness level temporarily. On Windows Vista, the default
brightness level is loaded after sleep (standby), hibernation, reboot, or detaching or attaching an ac
power adapter. To change the default brightness level, change the settings of the Power Option in the
Control Panel or use Power Manager.
• Fn+End: The computer display becomes dimmer.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
35
The purpose of this method is to change the brightness level temporarily. On Windows Vista, the default
brightness level is loaded after sleep (standby), hibernation, reboot, or detaching or attaching an ac
power adapter. To change the default brightness level, change the settings of the Power Option in the
Control Panel or use Power Manager.
• Fn+Spacebar: Enable the FullScreen Magnifier function.
• Fn+F2: Lock your computer.
• Fn+F8: Change the settings of the UltraNav pointing device.
• Fn+PrtSc: Have the same function as the SysRq key.
• Fn+ScrLk: Enable or disable the numeric keypad. The indicator of numeric lock is displayed on the
screen.
• Fn+Pause: Have the same function as the Break key.
• Fn+cursor keys: These key combinations are for use with Windows Media Player. They have the
following functions:
– Fn + down arrow key: Play or Pause
– Fn + up arrow key: Stop
– Fn + right arrow key: Next Track
– Fn + left arrow key: Previous Track
Volume and mute buttons
You can adjust the sound level of the built-in speakers by using the following three buttons:
1
2
3
Speaker mute button
Volume control button
Microphone mute
If you mute the sound and then turn off your computer, the sound will remain muted when you turn on your
computer again. To turn on the sound, press the plus (+) or minus (-) button.
36
User Guide
Setting the volume
Each device has volume controls, which you can set.
To open the window for adjusting the output volume or the recording volume, do the following:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound ➙ Sound. The Sound window appears.
2. Click the Playback tab or Recording tab, and then click a device, which you want to customize.
3. Click the Properties button.
4. Click the Levels tab, and then change the volume by moving the slider.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices ➙ Sounds and Audio Device.
The Sounds and Audio Device Properties window appears.
2. Click the Audio tab, and then click the Volume button in Sound Playback or Sound Recording.
Notes:
• You can also get access to the desktop volume control by using the volume icon in the task bar at the
lower right of the screen. To open the Volume Control window, click the volume icon. To control the
volume, move the volume control slider up or down. To turn off the sound, select Mute speakers (in
Windows Vista and Windows XP, Mute).
• The names of windows or fields are slightly different depending on the operating system you use.
• For details about controlling volume, refer to your Windows online help.
Setting the microphone mute button in Windows 7 and Windows Vista
By default, you can toggle all of your recording devices between the mute state and the un-mute state by
pressing the microphone mute button.
If you want to toggle one of the recording devices between the mute state and the un-mute state, do
the following:
1. Press Fn+F6. The Communications settings window opens.
2. Click the Manage Settings button. The Communications Utility window opens.
3. On the VoIP Call Settings tab, click Microphone mute button settings. The Setting for Microphone
Mute window opens.
4. Select Only the recording device selected below:. Then select the recording device from the
drop-down list box.
5. Click OK.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
37
Windows key and Application key
The following two keys are on your computer keyboard:
1
Windows key
If you press this key, the Start menu of Windows is displayed or hidden.
If you press this key and another key at the same time, the System Properties window or the Computer (in
Windows XP, My Computer) window is displayed. For details, refer to the Help in Windows operating system.
2
Application key
To display the shortcut menu for an object, select the object on the desktop or within an application and
then press this key.
38
User Guide
Using the UltraNav pointing device
Your computer may come with the UltraNav pointing device. The UltraNav consists of the TrackPoint and
the touch pad, each of which is itself a pointing device with both basic and extended functions. You can
configure both devices by choosing the settings you prefer as follows:
• Set both the TrackPoint and the touch pad as pointing devices.
This setting enables the use of all the basic and extended functions of the TrackPoint and the touch pad.
• Set the TrackPoint as the main pointing device and the touch pad for extended functions only.
This setting enables the use of all basic and extended functions with the TrackPoint while limiting the use
of the touch pad to scrolling, tap zones, and slow-motion pointer functions.
• Set the touch pad as the main pointing device and the TrackPoint for the extended functions only.
This setting enables the use of all basic and extended functions with the touch pad while limiting the
use of the TrackPoint to scrolling and Magnifying Glass functions.
• Set the TrackPoint as the main pointing device, and disable the touch pad.
• Set the touch pad as the main pointing device, and disable the TrackPoint.
Changing the UltraNav settings
You can change your settings of UltraNav in the UltraNav tab of the Mouse Properties window. To open it,
use one of the following methods:
• Press Fn+F8, and the UltraNav Device Settings window is displayed. In this window, click Manage
Settings. A mouse properties window is displayed. Click the UltraNav tab.
• Use the Start menu of your computer as follows:
– For Windows 7 and Windows Vista: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound ➙ Mouse
➙ UltraNav tab.
– For Windows XP: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Printers and Other Hardware ➙ Mouse ➙
UltraNav tab.
You can also change the UltraNav settings by clicking the UltraNav icon on the system tray. To display the
UltraNav icon on the system tray, see “Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray” on page 42.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
39
Using the TrackPoint pointing device
The TrackPoint pointing device consists of a pointing stick (1) on the keyboard and three click buttons at the
bottom of the keyboard. To move the pointer (5) on the screen, you apply pressure to the nonslip cap on the
pointing stick in any direction parallel to the keyboard; the pointing stick itself does not move. The speed at
which the pointer moves depends on the pressure you apply to the pointing stick. The functions of the left (4)
and right (2) click buttons correspond to those of the left and right mouse buttons on a conventional mouse.
The TrackPoint center button (3), called the scroll bar, enables you to scroll Web pages or documents in any
direction with no need to use the graphic scroll bars on the side of the window.
If you are not familiar with the TrackPoint, these instructions will help you get started:
1. Place your hands in the typing position, and press gently with either index finger on the pointing stick in
the direction in which you want the pointer to move.
To move the pointer, press the pointing stick away from you to move it up, toward you to move it
down, to one side or the other to move it sideways.
Note: The pointer might drift. This is not a defect. Stop using the TrackPoint for a few seconds; the
pointer will stop moving.
2. To select and drag as required by your software, press the left or right click button with either thumb
and move the TrackPoint pointing stick.
By enabling Press-to-Select, you can make the TrackPoint pointing stick function the same as the
left or right click button.
Customizing the TrackPoint
You can customize the TrackPoint pointing device and its buttons as follows:
• Switch the functions of the left and right buttons.
• Change the sensitivity of the TrackPoint.
• Enable the Press-to-Select function.
• Enable the Magnifying Glass.
• Enable the TrackPoint scrolling function.
• Enable the TrackPoint Scrolling Tips.
To customize the TrackPoint, do as follows:
1. Press Fn+F8. A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up.
2. Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window.
40
User Guide
3. Click the UltraNav tab. Under TrackPoint, proceed to changing the settings.
For details, refer to the Help in the Utility.
Changing the cap
The cap (1) on the end of the TrackPoint pointing stick is removable. You can replace it as shown in the
drawing.
Note: If you replace the keyboard, a new keyboard is shipped with the default cap. If you wish, you can
keep the cap from your old keyboard and use it on the new one.
Using the touch pad
The touch pad consists of a pad (1) and two click buttons below the TrackPoint buttons at the bottom of the
keyboard. To move the pointer (4) on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which
you want the pointer to move. The functions of the left (3) and right (2) click buttons correspond to those of
the left and right mouse buttons on a conventional mouse.
Using the multi-touch touch pad
The touch pad of your computer supports multi-touch with which you can zoom in, zoom out, scroll or rotate
on the screen while browsing the Internet or reading or editing a document.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
41
For details, refer to the Help in the UltraNav.
Customizing the touch pad
To customize the touch pad, do as follows:
1. Press Fn+F8. A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up.
2. Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window.
3. Click the UltraNav tab and proceed to customizing the touch pad.
For details, refer to the Help in the Utility.
Behavior of the UltraNav and an external mouse
By default, the TrackPoint and the touch pad are set to Enabled.
Note: If you want to attach an external mouse to a USB connector, select “Disabled.”
Disabling the TrackPoint or the touch pad
If you want to disable the TrackPoint or the touch pad, do either of the following:
Use the Fn+F8 key combination:
1. Press Fn+F8. A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up.
2. To disable the TrackPoint, select Enable touch pad only (disable TrackPoint).
To disable the touch pad, select Enable TrackPoint only (disable touch pad).
3. Click Close.
Configure settings in UltraNav properties window:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound ➙ Mouse.
2. Click UltraNav tab.
3. To disable the TrackPoint, clear the check box for Enable TrackPoint.
To disable the touch pad, clear the check box for Enable touch pad.
4. Click OK.
For Windows XP
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Printers and Other Hardware ➙ Mouse.
2. Click UltraNav tab.
3. To disable the TrackPoint, clear the check box for Enable TrackPoint.
To disable the touch pad, clear the check box for Enable touch pad.
4. Click OK.
Note: You can also open the UltraNav properties window by clicking the UltraNav icon in the task bar. For
details, refer to the instructions in “Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray” on page 42.
Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray
For easy access to the UltraNav properties, you can add the UltraNav icon on the system tray.
To enable the display of the UltraNav icon on the system tray, do as follows:
42
User Guide
1. Press Fn+F8. A panel headed UltraNav Device Settings pops up.
2. Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window.
3. Click the UltraNav tab.
4. Select the check box for Show UltraNav icon on the system tray.
5. Click OK or Apply.
6. If your computer is a Windows 7 model, click Show hidden icons in the task bar. The UltraNav icon is
displayed. To add it to the task bar permanently, click Customize and proceed to customize the settings.
You can now change the properties of UltraNav by clicking the UltraNav icon on the system tray.
Touch panel
Some models have the touch panel feature. This feature makes interaction with your computer even more
natural, because you can use fingers instead of a pen for navigation on the go.
For a single click, tap the display once with your finger. For a double click, tap the display twice without
pausing. For a right click, tap the display once and then hold your finger on the display until a circular symbol
appears. When you take your finger off the display, the right-click menu will open.
Using the multitouch panel
On a model that has the multitouch panel feature, the touch panel supports multitouch, with which you can
zoom in, zoom out, scroll, or rotate on the screen with your two fingers while browsing the Internet or
reading or editing a document.
The multitouch panel supports the capacitive touch. Even the slightest contact of your electron-rich finger
with the screen's glass is enough to activate the capacitive sensing system. This function does not work
with inanimate objects, fingernails, gloved fingers.
Tips on using the touch panel
Following are some tips on using the touch panel:
• The touch panel is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. Do not use any pen or any metallic object,
because to do so might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction.
• With the touch panel, gradually a discrepancy may start to appear between the point you touch with your
finger during the finger point, and its actual position on the screen. To avoid this, regularly correct the
accuracy of the finger input by use of the touch panel Settings Utility.
• The touch panel of your computer supports multitouch with which you can:
– Pinch two fingers together or apart to zoom in or out on a document.
– Scroll window contents by moving two fingers up and down, left and right.
– Touch two points on a digital photo and twist to rotate it just like a real photo.
Cleaning the touch panel display
To clean the touch panel display, do the following:
1. To remove fingerprints, etc., from the touch panel display, use a dry, soft, lint-free cloth or a piece of
absorbent cotton. Do not apply solvents to the cloth.
2. Gently wipe foreign particles and dust from the touch panel with one side of the cloth.
3. Wipe smudges or fingerprints with the other side of the cloth, or with a clean cloth.
4. After using the cloth, wash it with a neutral detergent.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
43
Power management
When you need to use your computer away from electrical outlets, you depend on battery power to keep
your computer running. Different computer components consume power at different rates. The more you
use the power-intensive components, the faster you consume battery power.
Do more, save more and spend more time unplugged with ThinkPad batteries. Mobility has revolutionized
business by allowing you to take your work where ever you go. With ThinkPad batteries, you will be able to
work longer without being tied to an electrical outlet.
Checking battery status
The Power Manager Battery Gauge in the task tray displays the percentage of battery power remaining.
The rate at which you use battery power will determine how long you can use the battery of your computer
between charges. Because each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how
long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
• How much energy is stored in the battery when you begin to work.
• The way you use your computer: how often you access the hard disk drive or the solid state drive, how
bright you make the computer display.
Using the ac power adapter
The power to run your computer can come either from the lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery pack provided with it,
or from ac power through the ac power adapter. While you use ac power, the battery charges automatically.
The ac power adapter that comes with your computer has two basic components:
1. The transformer pack that converts ac power adapter for use with the computer.
2. The power cord that plugs into the AC outlet and into the transformer pack.
Attention: Using an improper power cord could cause severe damage to your computer.
To use the ac power adapter, do the following. Be sure to take these steps in the order in which they are
given here.
1. Connect the ac power adapter to the power jack of the computer.
2. Connect the power cord to the transformer pack.
3. Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
You can check the status of your battery at any time by looking at the battery meter at the bottom of your
display.
Notes:
• When the ac power adapter is not in use, disconnect it from the electrical outlet.
• Do not bind the power cord tightly around the ac power transformer pack when it is connected to the
transformer.
• You can charge the battery when the ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the battery is
installed. You need to charge it in any of the following conditions:
– When you purchase a new battery.
– If the battery status indicator starts blinking.
– If the battery has not been used for a long time.
44
User Guide
Before you charge the battery, make sure that its temperature is at least 10°C (50°F).
Charging the battery
When you check battery status and find that the percentage of power remaining is low or when the power
alarm alerts you that remaining power is low, you need to charge your battery or replace it with a charged
battery.
If an ac outlet is convenient, plug the ac power adapter into it, and then insert the jack into the computer. The
battery will charge in about 3 to 6 hours. This is affected by the battery size and the physical environment.
The battery status indicator will let you know that the battery is charging, and will also notify you when the
battery is fully charged.
Note: To increase the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining
power is greater than 95%.
Maximizing battery life
To maximize the life of the battery, do the following:
• Use the battery until the charge is completely depleted-until the battery status indicator starts blinking
orange.
• Recharge the battery completely before using it. The battery is fully charged if the battery indicator shows
green when the ac power adapter is plugged in.
• For a new battery or a battery that you have not used recently, do one of the following:
1. Recharge the battery completely before using it. The battery is fully charged when the ac power
adapter is plugged in and the battery indicator is green.
2. Use the battery until the charge is completely depleted-until the battery status indicator starts
blinking orange.
• Always use power management features such as power modes, screen blank, sleep (standby), and
hibernation.
Managing your battery power
With Power Manager, you can adjust your power settings to give you the best balance between performance
and power saving.
To start the utility program, do as follows:
• For Windows 7: See “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP: Click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Power Manager.
For more information about the Power Manager program, refer to the on-line help of the program.
Power-saving modes
There are several modes that you can use at any time to conserve power. This section introduces each
mode and gives tips on the effective use of the battery power.
Introducing the power-saving modes
• Screen blank. The computer display requires considerable battery power. To turn off power to the
display, do as follows:
1. Press Fn+F3. A panel for selecting a power plan (in Windows XP, power scheme) appears.
2. Select Power off display (keep current power plan) (in Windows XP, keep current power scheme).
Chapter 2. Using your computer
45
Notes: You can also turn off the computer display as follows:
1. Press Fn+F3. A panel for selecting a power plan (in Windows XP, power scheme) appears.
2. Select Fn+F3 Settings.
3. Select Power off display.
4. Click OK. The next time you press Fn+F3, you can turn off the computer display.
• Sleep (standby in Windows XP). In sleep (standby) mode, your work is saved to memory, and then the
solid state drive or the hard disk drive and the computer display are turned off. When your computer
wakes up, your work is restored within seconds.
To put your computer into sleep (standby) mode, press Fn+F4. To return from sleep (standby) mode,
press the Fn key.
• Hibernation. By using this mode, you can turn off your computer completely without saving files or
exiting from any applications that are running. When you enter hibernation, all open applications, folders,
and files are saved to the hard disk, and then the computer turns off. To enter hibernation, press Fn+F12.
To resume your session, press the power button for no more than 4 seconds.
When you are not using the wireless features, such as Bluetooth or wireless LAN, turn them off. This will
help conserve power. To turn off the wireless features, press Fn+F5.
Enabling the wakeup function
If you put your computer into hibernation mode, and the wakeup function is disabled (this is the default
setting), the computer does not consume any power. If the wakeup function is enabled, it consumes a small
amount of power. To enable the function, do as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ System and Security (in Windows Vista, System and Maintenance).
2. Click Administrative Tools.
3. Click Task Scheduler. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
4. From the left pane, select the task folder for which you want to enable the wakeup function. The
scheduled tasks are displayed.
5. Click a scheduled task, and then click the Conditions tab.
6. Under Power, select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Performance and Maintenance.
2. Click Scheduled Tasks. The scheduled tasks are displayed.
3. Right-click on a scheduled task.
4. Click Properties.
5. Click the Settings tab.
6. Under Power Management, select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task.
Enabling the battery alarm
You can program your computer so that when the battery power falls below a certain level, three events
occur: the alarm goes off, a message is displayed, and the LCD is turned off. Do as follows:
1. Start Power Manager.
2. Click the Global Power Settings tab.
46
User Guide
3. For Low battery alarm or Critically low battery alarm, set the percentage of the power level and set
the action.
Note: If your computer enters sleep (standby) or hibernation mode when the battery is low, but the alarm
message has not yet appeared, the message will appear when the computer resumes. To resume normal
operation, press OK.
Handling the battery
DANGER
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery pack.
Attempting to do so can cause an explosion, or liquid leakage from the battery pack.
A battery pack other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery
pack is not covered by the warranty.
DANGER
If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery
pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:
• Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Do not expose it to excessive heat.
• Do not expose it to water or rain.
• Do not short-circuit it.
• Store it in a cool dry place.
• Keep it away from children.
The battery pack is a consumable supply.
If your battery begins to discharge too quickly, replace the battery pack with a new one of the type
recommended by Lenovo. For more information on replacing the battery pack, contact your Customer
Support Center.
DANGER
Do not drop, crush, puncture, or subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause
the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to “vent” from the battery pack or coin
cell. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup
of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from
the battery manufacturer.
DANGER
Only recharge the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product
documentation.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
47
DANGER
Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery,
comply with local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards.
DANGER
There is a danger of an explosion if the backup battery is incorrectly placed. The lithium battery
contains lithium and can explode if it is not properly handled, or disposed of. Replace only with a
battery of the same type. To avoid possible injury or death, Do not: (1) throw or immerse into water,
(2) allow it to heat to more than 100°C (212°F), or (3) attempt to repair or disassemble it. Dispose of
it as required by local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards.
This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The system will
continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries.
Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and
provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use.
48
User Guide
Connecting to the network
Your computer has one or more network adapters for connecting to the Internet and to your company's
wired LAN or wireless LAN network.
Note: Some models come with a built-in wireless WAN card enabling you to establish wireless connections
over remote public or private networks.
Access Connections is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles. Each
location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network
infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office.
Your modem enables you to connect to your network or the Internet from almost anywhere. If your network
has a phone line or lines dedicated to dial-up clients, you can use a modem to establish a connection to the
LAN. If your network does not have dial-up networking capability (and many do not), you might be able to
access some information and e-mail over the Internet.
Ethernet connections
You can connect to your network or a broadband connection, such as DSL or CATV, by use of the Ethernet
feature built into your computer. This feature enables you to do 1Gbps half or full duplex data transmission.
To connect to a network via Ethernet, you can use Access Connections.
Note: Your computer might have both a modem connector and an Ethernet connector. Be sure to connect
your cable to the correct one.
Wireless connections
Wireless connection is the transfer of data without the use of cables by means of radio waves only.
Depending on the frequency used for data transmission, the area covered, or the type of the device used for
data transfer, the following categories of wireless networks may be available to you:
Wireless LAN
A wireless local area network covers a relatively small geographic area, such as an office building or a house.
Devices based on the 802.11 standards can connect to this network.
Wireless WAN
A wireless wide area network covers a broader geographic area. Cellular networks are used for data
transmission, and access is provided by a wireless service carrier.
Bluetooth
One of a number of technologies used to create a wireless personal area network. Bluetooth can connect
devices a short distance from one another, and is commonly used for connecting peripheral devices to a
computer, transferring data between hand-held devices and PC, or remotely controlling and communicating
with devices such as mobile phones.
WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access)
This long-range wireless data transmission technology based on the 802.16 standard is expected to provide
the user a “last mile” broadband connectivity similar to that provided by cable or ADSL, but without the need
to physically connect a cable to the PC.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
49
Making wireless LAN connections
Your computer comes with a built-in wireless networking card and a configuration utility to help you make
wireless connections and monitor the status of your connection, so that you can stay connected to your
network while you are in the office, in a meeting room, or at home, with no need for a wired connection.
Attention:
• If you carry your computer with the wireless LAN feature into an airplane, check the services with the
airline before boarding the airplane.
• If there are restrictions on the use of computers on an airplane with the wireless feature, you need to
disable it before boarding. To disable it, refer to the instructions in “Enabling or disabling the wireless
feature” on page 56.
Note: You can purchase a wireless networking card as an option. For more information, refer to “Finding
ThinkPad options” on page 171.
Tips for using the wireless LAN feature
• Place your computer so that there are as few obstacles as possible between the wireless LAN access
point and the computer.
• For the best connection of the wireless LAN feature, open your computer display to an angle of slightly
more than 90 degrees.
• If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standard) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth
option, data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be
degraded.
Wireless networking setup
To use the built-in wireless networking card (the 802.11 standard) to communicate, start Access Connections.
For Windows 7: To start the Access Connections wizard, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on
page 23, and follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP: To start the Access Connections wizard, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Access Connections, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: Before you start setting up wireless networking connections by using Access Connections, obtain a
Network Name (SSID) and your encryption information from your network administrator.
Access Connections, a connectivity assistant program, can easily enable one network adapter and disable
the other adapters on demand. After setting up your wireless networking connection, you can use the
program to quickly switch the network settings.
Wireless upgradeable ThinkPad models
Your computer can be wireless upgradeable. This means that your computer has an antenna that can
support wireless LAN access when wireless LAN access points are available. To see more details about the
wireless devices available from Lenovo, refer to “Finding ThinkPad options” on page 171.
Using wireless WAN connections
Wireless Wide Area Network (wireless WAN) enables you to establish wireless connections over remote
public or private networks. These connections can be maintained over a large geographical area, such as
a city or an entire country, by use of multiple antenna sites or satellite systems maintained by wireless
service providers.
Some ThinkPad notebooks come with a built-in wireless WAN card integrating some wireless WAN
technologies, such as 1xEV-DO, HSPA, 3G or GPRS. You can connect to the Internet or your company
50
User Guide
network with the built-in wireless WAN card and the configuration utility to make a wireless WAN connection
and monitor its status.
Note: Wireless WAN service is provided by authorized service providers in some countries.
To find the location of the wireless WAN antenna on your computer, refer to “Location of the UltraConnect
wireless antennas” on page 264.
To use the wireless WAN feature, start Access Connections.
For Windows 7: To start the Access Connections wizard, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on
page 23, and follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP: To start the Access Connections wizard, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Access Connections. Then follow the instructions on the screen.
Using Bluetooth
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista
If your computer is equipped with the Integrated Bluetooth features, you can enable or disable the features
by pressing Fn+F5. If you press Fn+F5, a list of wireless features is displayed. You can enable or disable the
Bluetooth features with a single click.
To configure a Bluetooth device or manage connection settings, you can use Bluetooth Devices in Control
Panel.
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Devices and Printers (in Windows Vista, Bluetooth Devices).
To send data to a Bluetooth-enabled device, do as follows:
1. Right-click data that you want to send.
2. Select Send To ➙ Bluetooth Devices.
For details, refer to the Windows online help.
Note: If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standard) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth
option, data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be
degraded.
For Windows XP
If your computer is equipped with the Integrated Bluetooth features, you can enable or disable the features
by pressing Fn+F5.
If you press Fn+F5, a list of wireless features is displayed. You can enable or disable the Bluetooth features
with a single click.
In Windows XP, you can use either ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, or the Microsoft
Bluetooth software. By default, ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software is installed on your
computer.
Using Bluetooth for the first time on your computer
If this is the first time Bluetooth has been used on your computer, follow either of the following procedures:
Chapter 2. Using your computer
51
1. Double-click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop, or the Bluetooth icon in the task bar. The
Start Using Bluetooth window opens, and some virtual device drivers are installed automatically.
2. Wait until the installation of the drivers is complete.
OR
1. Right-click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop, or the Bluetooth icon in the task bar.
2. Select Start Using Bluetooth. The Start Using Bluetooth window opens, and some virtual device
drivers are installed automatically.
3. Wait until the installation of the drivers is complete.
Some other virtual device drivers will be installed on demand when you use certain Bluetooth profiles
for the first time.
Using the Microsoft Bluetooth software
If you are using Windows XP and want to use the Microsoft standard Bluetooth features, install the software
by following the instructions in “Installing the Microsoft Bluetooth software in Windows XP” on page 53.
For information about how to use the Bluetooth function, do as follows:
1. Press Fn+F5 to turn on Bluetooth.
2. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Click Printers and Other Hardware.
4. Click Bluetooth Devices.
5. Click the Options tab.
6. Click Learn more about Bluetooth Settings.
Using ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software
If ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software is installed on your computer, two icons are
displayed on the screen:
• My Bluetooth Places on the desktop
• Bluetooth Configuration in the system tray of the task bar
To use the Bluetooth features, do the following:
1. Double-click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop.
2. For Windows XP, go to Bluetooth Tasks and double-click View devices in range. A list of the devices
on which Bluetooth has been enabled appears.
3. Click the device to which you want access. A list of the services available on that device appears,
as follows:
• Bluetooth keyboard and mouse (Human interface devices)
• Printer (HCRP)
• Audio gateway
• Headset
• PIM synchronization
• Fax
• File transfer
• PIM item transfer
52
User Guide
• Dial-up networking
• Network access
• Bluetooth serial port
• Bluetooth Imaging
• Hands Free
• AV profile
4. Click the service you want.
For more information, press the F1 key to open the online help for Bluetooth.
Bluetooth Configuration
To use the configuration features of Bluetooth, right-click the icon. A pop-up menu appears. Select
Bluetooth Setup Wizard or Advanced Configuration.
The Bluetooth Setup Wizard has the following capabilities:
• Finding all Bluetooth-enabled devices that can provide services
• Finding a specific Bluetooth-enabled device that you want to use, and configuring the services on that
device
• Configuring the Bluetooth-enabled services on your computer that are provided for remote devices
• Configuring the name and device type of your computer
The Advanced Configuration has the following functions:
• Configuring the name and device type of your computer
• Configuring your computer settings so that remote Bluetooth-enabled devices can find your computer
• Configuring your computer settings so that your computer can find remote Bluetooth-enabled devices
• Configuring, on your computer, the Bluetooth-enabled services provided for remote devices
• Configuring the services on remote Bluetooth-enabled devices
• Displaying information about Bluetooth hardware
For details, refer to the help for Bluetooth. To see the help, double-click My Bluetooth Places, and click
Help and then Bluetooth help. Another way to start the help is to right-click Bluetooth Configuration in the
system tray of the task bar, and click Advanced Configuration and then Help.
Installing the Microsoft Bluetooth software in Windows XP
If you want to use the Microsoft Bluetooth software, do as follows:
First uninstall the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software.
1. Turn Bluetooth power off.
2. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Click Add or Remove Programs.
4. Select ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software; then click Change/Remove to
uninstall the software.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Next install the Microsoft Bluetooth software as follows:
1. Turn Bluetooth power on. Microsoft Bluetooth software is loaded automatically.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
53
2. If the Found New Hardware Wizard window pops up, do the following:
a. Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
b. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced); then click Next.
c. Select Search for the best driver in those locations.
d. Select Include this location in the search:, and type C:\SWTOOLS\Drivers\MSBTooth, or specify the
location in which you placed the extracted INF file. Then click Next.
3. Click Finish.
Installing ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software in Windows XP
If you are using the Microsoft Bluetooth software and want to use ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data
Rate Software instead, replace the Microsoft Bluetooth software with ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced
Data Rate Software as follows:
1. Press Fn+F5 to turn the Bluetooth power on.
2. Click Start ➙ Run.
3. Type C:\SWTOOLS\Drivers\TPBTooth\Setup.exe (or specify the full path to the setup.exe file you have
downloaded from http://support.lenovo.com); then click OK.
4. Click Next.
5. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement; then click Next.
6. Click Next to select the default destination folder.
If you need to change the destination folder, click Change, select or enter the name of the destination
folder in the Change current destination folder window, and click OK.
7. Click Install to begin installation.
8. Click OK to accept the driver signature.
9. Click Finish.
10. Restart the computer if necessary.
If you did not turn the Bluetooth power on before installing ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate
Software, that is, if you skipped step 1- replace the Bluetooth driver as follows:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance; then click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab; then click Device Manager.
4. Double-click Bluetooth Radios to extract the Bluetooth Radios device tree.
5. Double-click the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate icon to open the Properties window.
6. Click the Driver tab; then click Update Driver.
7. Click No, not this time, and then click Next.
8. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
9. Select Don't search. I will choose the driver to install; then click Next.
10. Select the driver that has no “Digital Signed” icon; then click Next.
11. Click Finish.
Note: If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standard) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth
option, data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be
degraded.
54
User Guide
Using WiMAX
Some ThinkPad notebooks come with a built-in wireless LAN card integrating WiMAX technology.
WiMAX, a long-range wireless data transmission technology based on the 802.16 standard, provides you
with a “last mile” broadband connectivity similar to that offered by cable or ADSL, but without the need to
physically connect a cable to the PC.
To use the WiMAX feature, start Access Connections.
For Windows 7: To start the Access Connections wizard, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on
page 23, and follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP: To start the Access Connections wizard, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Access Connections. Then follow the instructions on the screen.
Checking wireless connection status
Access Connections Gauge (Windows 7)
If your computer is running Windows 7, the Access Connections Gauge in the task bar displays the signal
strength and status of your wireless connection.
Note: To display Access Connections Gauge in the task bar, see the Help in Access Connections.
You can find more detailed information about the signal strength and status of your wireless connection
by opening Access Connections or by right-clicking the Access Connections Gauge in the task bar and
selecting View Status of Wireless Connection.
• Access Connections Gauge states: wireless LAN
–
–
Power to the wireless radio is off or no signal.
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To
improve signal strength, move your system closer to the wireless access point.
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection
–
is marginal.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is
excellent.
• Access Connections Gauge states: wireless WAN
–
No signal
–
Signal level 1
–
Signal level 2
–
Signal level 3
Note: For more information about Access Connections Gauge, see the Help in Access Connections.
Access Connections icon and wireless status icon
The Access Connections icon displays general connection status.
The wireless status icon displays the signal strength and status of your wireless connection.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
55
You can find more detailed information about the signal strength and status of your wireless connection
either by opening Access Connections or by double-clicking the Access Connections wireless status
icon in the task bar.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, to display the Access Connections status icon and the
wireless status icon in the system tray, refer to the Access Connections on-line help.
• Access Connections icon states
–
No location profile is active or none exists.
–
Current location profile is disconnected.
–
Current location profile is connected.
• Wireless status icon states: wireless LAN
–
Power to the wireless radio is off.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. No association.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. No signal.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is excellent.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is marginal.
–
Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To improve
signal strength, move your system closer to the wireless access point.
• Wireless status icon states: wireless WAN
–
Power to the WAN radio is off
–
No association
–
No signal
–
Signal level 1
–
Signal level 2
–
Signal level 3
Note: If you have trouble in making a connection, try moving your computer closer to your wireless access
point.
Enabling or disabling the wireless feature
To enable or disable the wireless feature, press Fn+F5. A list of wireless features is displayed. You can turn
the feature on and off with a single click.
You can also enable or disable the feature by the following procedures.
To enable the wireless feature, do as follows:
1. Click the Access Connections wireless status icon in the system tray.
2. Click Power On Wireless Radio.
To disable the wireless feature, do as follows:
• Click the Access Connections wireless status icon in the system tray.
• Click Power Off Wireless Radio.
Notes:
56
User Guide
• You can use the wireless radio switch to disable the wireless radio of all the wireless devices on your
computer.
• If your computer is a Windows 7 model, to display the Access Connections status icon and the wireless
status icon in the system tray, refer to the Access Connections on-line help.
Using the built-in modem
If your computer has a modem feature, you can send or receive data and faxes over a telephone line. This
modem uses a digital signal processor (DSP), and its software can be upgraded, allowing great flexibility.
You can use the modem only on a public-switched telephone network (PSTN). You cannot use a private
branch exchange (PBX) or some other type of digital telephone extension line. If you connect the modem to
a line other than PSTN, an error message appears, preventing you from using the line. If you are not sure
which kind of phone line you are using, contact your telephone company.
DANGER
To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the cable to or disconnect the cable from the telephone
outlet on the wall during electrical storms.
Note: Your computer might have both the modem connector and the Ethernet connector. Be sure to
connect your cable to the correct one.
Telephony features
The built-in modem has the following telephony features:
Industry standard modem support up to 56 Kbps:
Data protocols
• Bell 103 (300 bps)
• Bell 212A (1200 bps)
• V.21 (300 bps)
• V.22bis (2400 bps)
• V.34bis (33600, 31200 bps)
• V.34 (28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps)
• V.90 (56000 bps downstream only)
Error correction/Data compression protocols
• MNP2-4 (Microcom error correction)
• V.42 (error-correcting procedures for DCEs using asynchronous automatic dialing and control)
Data compression protocols
• V.42bis (DCE data compression)
• V.44
• MNP5 (Microcom data compression)
Miscellaneous protocols
• V.8 (startup sequence)
• V.80 (video phone)
Chapter 2. Using your computer
57
• Fast Connect
Note: This function can work only if the phone line and server equipment at your ISP (Internet Service
Provider) access point are compatible with it. Check with your telephone company and ISP.
• Modem on Hold
Note: This function can be used only in certain countries or regions, because it relies on the specifications
of the Call Waiting function and Caller ID function, which each country or region sets independently. It has
been tested and shown to work in the United States and Canada. In addition, the function can work only if
it is compatible with the server equipment at your ISP.
Industry standard fax support up to 14.4 Kbps:
Fax protocols
• V.21 Ch 2 (300-bps fax)
• V.17 (up to 14.4-Kbps fax)
• V.29 (9600-bps fax)
• V.27ter (4800-bps fax)
Computer telephony function support:
• DTMF and pulse dialing
• Detecting DTMF digits received from the phone line
• Call progress monitoring
• An auto-dialing feature
• Telephony API (TAPI)
Modem commands
This section provides information on the AT modem commands, in case you need to operate your modem
from terminal software.
Running commands
Your modem is in command mode at power-on and is ready to receive and run AT commands. It remains in
command mode until it connects with a remote modem. You can send commands to the modem from an
attached terminal or a PC running a communication program.
The modem is designed to operate at common DTE speeds ranging from 115.2 Kbps (or 57.6 Kbps) to 300
Kbps. All commands and data must be issued to the modem at one of the valid DTE speeds.
Command format
All commands except A/ must begin with the prefix AT, followed by the command letter, and must end with
the Enter key. Spaces are allowed in the command string to increase readability, but the modem ignores
them while executing a command. All commands may be typed in either uppercase or lowercase, but not in
mixed case. A command issued without a parameter is considered to have parameter “0”.
Examples: ATL[Ent er]
This command causes your modem to lower the volume from its speaker.
Refer to the following tables of AT commands and extended AT commands.
58
User Guide
Table 3. Modem command list
Command
Description
Syntax
Z
Reset to default
configuration
Z
+FCLASS
Select Active Service
Class
+FCL
CLAS
+F
CLASS
ASS=<Mode>
Values
<Mode>
0: Select Data Mode
1: Select Facsimile Class 1
Mode
1.0: Select Facsimile Class 1.0
Mode
8: Select Voice Mode
+VCID
Caller ID
+VCID
ID=<pmode>
+VC
ID
<pmode>
0: Disable Caller ID reporting
1: Enables Caller ID with
formatted presentation to the
DTE.
2: Enables Caller ID with
unformatted presentation to the
DTE.
+VRID
Report Retrieved Caller ID
+VRID=<pmode>
+VRID
<pmode>
0: Reports Caller ID with
formatted presentation to the
DTE.
1: Reports Caller ID with
unformatted presentation to the
DTE.
\N
Operating Mode
\N<mode>
\N
<mode>
0: Selects normal speed
buffered mode (disables
error-correction mode)
and forces &Q6 (selects
asynchronous operation in
normal mode.)
1: Same as 0.
2: Selects reliable (error
correction) mode and forces
&Q5 (the modem will try to
negotiate an error corrected
link). The modem will first
attempt a LAPM connection and
then MNP connection. Failure
to make a reliable connection
results in the modem hanging
up.
3: Selects auto reliable mode
and forces &Q5 (the modem
will try to negotiate an error
corrected link). This operates
the same as \N2 except failure
to make a reliable connection
results in the modem falling back
Chapter 2. Using your computer
59
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
to the speed buffered normal
mode.
4: Select LAPM error-correction
mode and forces &Q5 (the
modem will try to negotiate an
error corrected link). Failure to
make an LAPM error-correction
connection result in the modem
hanging up.
5: Selects MNP error-correction
mode and forces &Q5 (the
modem will try to negotiate an
error corrected link). Failure to
make an MNP error-correction
connection results in the modem
hanging up.
&F
Set to Factory Defined
Configuration
&F
&T
Local Analog Loopback
Test
&T[<value>]
&T
<value>
0: Terminates test in progress.
1: Initiates local analog
loopback, V54 Loop 3. If a
connection exists when this
command is issued, the modem
hangs up. The CONNECT XXXX
message is displayed up the
start of the test.
I
Request Identification
Information
I[<value>]
<value>
0: Reports product code.
1: Reports the latest significant
byte of the stored checksum in
decimal.
2: Reports OK.
3: Reports identification codes.
4: Reports product description
from the .INF file.
5: Reports Country Code
parameter.
6: Reports modem data pump
model and internal code revision.
7: Reports modem data pump
model and internal code revision.
8: Reports the date and the time
of the modem driver build.
9: Reports Country.
+GMI
Request Manufacturer
Information
+GMI
+GMM
Request Model
Information
+GMM
60
User Guide
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
+GMR
Request Revision
Information
+GMR
+GSN
Request Product Serial
Number Identification
+GSN
+GOI
Request Global Object
Identification
+GOII
+GO
+GCAP
AP
+GC
Request Complete
Capabilities List
+GCAP
+GCI
Country of Installation
+GCII=<country_code>
+GC
Values
<country_code>
8-bit country code. The value is
the hexadecimal.
E
Echo Command
E[<value>]
<value>
0: Disables command echo.
1: Enables command echo.
Q
Quiet Results Codes
Control
Q[<value>]
<value>
0: Enable result codes to the
DTE.
1: Disable result codes to the
DTE.
V
Result Code Form
V[<value>]
<value>
0: Enables short-form result
codes.
1: Enables long-form result
codes.
W
Connect Message Control
W[<value>]
<value>
0: Upon connection, the modem
reports only the DTE speed.
Subsequent responses are
disabled.
1: Upon connection, the modem
reports the line speed, the
error correction protocol, and
the DTE speed, respectively.
Subsequent responses are
disabled.
2: Upon connection, the
modem reports the DCE speed.
Subsequent responses are
disabled.
3: Upon connection, the modem
reports DCE speed and the error
correction protocol.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
61
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
X
Extended Result Codes
X<value>
<value>
0: CONNECT result code is
given upon entering online
data state. Dial tone and busy
detection reporting are disabled.
1: CONNECT <text> result code
is given upon online data state.
Dial tone and busy detection
reporting are disabled.
2: CONNECT <text> result code
is given upon entering online
data state. Dial tone detection
reporting is enabled, and busy
detection reporting is disabled.
3: CONNECT <text> result code
is given upon entering online
data state. Dial tone detection
reporting is disabled, and busy
detection reporting is enabled.
4: CONNECT <text> result code
is given upon entering online
data state. Dial tone and busy
detection reporting are both
enabled.
&C
RLSD Behavior
&C[<value>]
&C
<value>
0: RLSD is always ON.
1: RLSD follows the state of the
carrier.
&D
DTR Behavior
&D[<value>]
&D
<value>
0: Modem ignores DTR.
1: Upon an on-to-off transition
of DTR, the modem enters online
command state and issues an
OK result code; the call remains
connected.
2: Upon an on-to off transition
of DTR, the modem instructs the
underlying modem to perform
an orderly cleardown of the call.
The disposition of any data in the
modem pending transmission to
the remote modem is controlled
by the +ETBM parameter;
otherwise, this data is sent
before the call is cleared, unless
the remote modem clears the
call first (in which case pending
data is discarded). The modem
disconnects from the line.
Automatic answer is disabled
while DTR remains off.
62
User Guide
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
&K
Flow Control
&K[<value>]
&K
<value>
0: Disables flow control.
3: Enables RTS or CTS flow
control.
4: Enables XON or XOFF flow
control.
5: Included for compatibility
only and has no effect other than
returning an OK result code.
6: Included for compatibility
only and has no effect other than
returning an OK result code.
&M
&Q
Asynchronous or
Synchronous Mode
Selection
&M[<value>]
&M
Sync or Async Mode
&Q[<value>]
&Q
<value>
0 to 3: Included for compatibility
only and has no effect other than
returning an OK result code.
<mode>
0 - 3, 6: Select asynchronous
operation in normal mode.
(speed buffering)
5: Select asynchronous
operation in error correction.
+IPR
Fixed DTE Rate
+IPR=<rate>
+IPR
<rate>
0 (autodetect), 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
+IFC
DTE-Modem Local Flow
Control
+IFCC=[<modem_by_DTE>
+IF
[,<DTE_by_modem>]]
<modem_by_DTE>
0: None.
1: XON or XOFF on transmitted
data; do not pass XON or
XOFF characters to the remote
modem.
2: Circuit 133.
<DTE_by_modem>
0: None.
1: XON or XOFF on received
data.
2: CTS or RTS.
+ILRR
DTE-Modem Local Rate
Reporting
+ILRR=<value>
+ILRR
<value>
0: Disable reporting of local port
rate.
1: Enable reporting of local port
rate.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
63
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
D
Dial
D<modifier>
<modifier>
0 - 9: DTMF digits 0 to 9.
A - D: DTMF digits A to D.
L: Redial last number.
P: Select pulse dialing.
T: Select tone dialing.
W: Wait for dial tone.
*: The “star” digit.
# : The “gate” digit.
!: Flash.
@: Wait for silence.
$: Wait for credit card dialing
tone before continuing with the
dial string.
&: Wait for credit card dialing
tone before continuing with the
dial string.
,: Dial pause.
;: Return to command state.
^: Toggle calling tone enable or
disable.
(), -, <space>: Ignored.
T
Set Tone Dial Default
T
P
Set Pulse Dial Default
P
A
Answer
A
H
Disconnect (Hang-Up)
H[<value>]
<value>
0: The modem will release the
line if the modem is currently
on-line.
1: If on-hook, the modem
will go off-hook and remain in
command mode.
O
Return to On-Line Data
Mode
O[<value>]
<value>
0: Enter on-line data mode from
the on-line command mode
without a retrain.
1: Performs a retrain then enter
on-line data mode from the
on-line command mode.
L
Speaker Volume
L[<value>]
<value>
0: Off
1: Low volume
2: Medium volume
3: High volume
64
User Guide
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
M
Speaker Control
M[<value>]
<value>
0: Speaker off.
1: Speaker on during call
establishment, but off when
receiving carrier.
2: Speaker on.
3: Speaker is off when receiving
carrier and during dialing, but on
during answering.
&G
Select Guard Tone
&G[<value>]
&G
<value>
0 to 2: Included for compatibility
only and has no effect other than
returning an OK result code.
&P
Select Pulse Dial Make or
Break Ratio
&P[<value>]
&P
<value>
0: Selects 39%-61% make or
break ratio at 10 pps.
1: Selects 33%-67% make or
break ratio at 10 pps.
2: Selects 39%-61% make or
break ratio at 20 pps.
3: Selects 33% or 67% make or
break ratio at 20 pps.
&V
Display Current
Configuration and Stored
Profile
&V
&W
Store Current
Configuration
&W
*B
Display Blacklisted
Numbers
*B
*D
Display Delayed Numbers
*D
#UD
Last Call Status Report
#UD
+PCW
Call Waiting Enable
+PCW
CW=<value>
+P
CW
<value>
0: Request modem-on hold if
enabled by +PMH and collect
caller ID information if enabled
by +VRID. Toggle V.24 circuit
125.
1: Hang-up.
2: Ignore call waiting.
+PMH
Modem-on-Hold Enable
+PMH=<value>
+PMH
<value>
0: Modem-on-Hold enabled.
1: Disabled modem-on-hold.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
65
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
+PMHT
Modem-on-Hold Timer
+PMHT=<value>
+PMHT
<value>
0: Deny modem-on-hold
Request.
1: Grant MOH with 10 sec.
timeout.
2: Grant MOH with 20 sec.
timeout.
3: Grant MOH with 30 sec.
timeout.
4: Grant MOH with 40 sec.
timeout.
5: Grant MOH with 1 min.
timeout.
6: Grant MOH with 2 min.
timeout.
7: Grant MOH with 3 min.
timeout.
8: Grant MOH with 4 min.
timeout.
9: Grant MOH with 6 min.
timeout.
10: Grant MOH with 8 min.
timeout.
11: Grant MOH with 12 min.
timeout.
12: Grant MOH with 16 min.
timeout.
13: Grant MOH with indefinite
timeout.
+PMHR
Initiate Modem-on-Hold
+PMHR
+PMHF
Modem-on-Hold Hook
Flash
+PMHF
+PQC
Shortened Phase 1/2
control
+PQC
QC=<value>
+P
QC
<value>
0: Enable Short Phase 1 and
Short Phase 2.
1: Enable Short Phase 1 only.
2: Not supported.
3: Disable Short Phase 1 and
Short Phase 2.
66
User Guide
Table 3. Modem command list (continued)
Command
Description
Syntax
Values
+PSS
Use Short Sequence
+PSSS=<value>
+P
<value>
0: The modem decides whether
or not to use the short startup
procedures.
1: Reserved.
2: Force the use of the full
startup procedures on the next
and subsequent connections
independent of the setting of the
+PQC command.
-QCPC
Force Full Startup
Procedure Next
Connection
-QCPCC
-QCP
-QCPS
Enable Quick Connect
Profile Save
-QCPSS=<value>
-QCP
<value>
0: Do not allow the quick
connect profile to be saved.
1: Allow the quick connect
profile to be saved.
Modem result codes
The following table lists the basic codes that the modem sends to your computer in response to the
commands you enter. They are called result codes.
Table 4. Modem result codes
Numeric
Result code
Description
+F4
+FCERROR
High speed fax data (V.27, V.29, V.33, or V.17) is expected but a V.21
signal is received.
0
OK
A command line has been executed.
1
CONNECT
For X command values specifying no speed reporting, the modem
has connected to the line and either the line speed is 300 bps and
line speed is enabled, or the DTE speed is 300 bps and DTE speed
reporting is enabled.
2
RING
An incoming ring signal is detected on the line. What qualifies as
a ring signal is determined by country-dependent parameters,
modifiable through ConfigurACE. When cellular interface is selected,
RING indicates that the cellular phone is receiving an incoming call.
3
NO CARRIER
Sent when attempting to establish a call if: Ringback is detected
and later ceases but no carrier is detected within the period of time
determined by register S7, or
1. No ringback is detected within the period of time determined
by register S7.
2. Also sent when the modem auto-disconnects due to loss of
carrier.
For X0, sent for the following conditions:
1. If busy tone detection is enforced, busy or circuit busy has
been detected.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
67
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
2. If dial tone detection is enforced or selected, dial tone has
not been detected.
ERROR
4
Sent during an attempt to execute a command line if any of the
following conditions occur:
1. The command line contains a syntax error.
2. The modem cannot execute a command contained in the
command line, i.e., the command does not exist or is not
supported.
3. A command parameter within the command line is outside
the permitted range.
For X0, X1, X2, and X3, this message is sent instead of DELAYED
and BLACKLISTED.
5
CONNECT 1200
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
1200 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
1200 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
6
NO DIALTONE
For X2 and X4, the modem has been instructed to wait for dial tone
during dialing but none is received. When cellular phone interface is
selected, indicates that cellular service is not currently available.
7
BUSY
For X3 and X4, if busy tone detection is enforced, the busy (engaged)
signal is detected on the line when the modem is attempting to
originate a call.
8
NO ANSWER
The modem is attempting to originate a call if a continuous ringback
signal is detected on the line until the expiration of the timer S7.
9
CONNECT 600
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 600 bps,
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
10
CONNECT 2400
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
2400 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
2400 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
11
CONNECT 4800
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
4800 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
4800 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
12
CONNECT 9600
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
9600 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
9600 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
13
CONNECT 7200
The modem has connected to the line at 7200 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
14
CONNECT 12000
The modem has connected to the line at 12000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
15
CONNECT 14400
The modem has connected to the line at 14400 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
16
CONNECT 19200
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
19200 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
19200 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
17
CONNECT 38400
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 38400 bps,
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
18
CONNECT 57600
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 57600 bps,
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
68
User Guide
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
19
CONNECT 115200
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 115200
bps, and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
22
CONNECT 75TX/1200RX
The modem has established a V.23 originate connection and line
speed reporting is enabled.
23
CONNECT 1200TX/75RX
The modem has established a V.23 answer connection and line
speed reporting is enabled.
24
DELAYED
For X4, sent when a call fails to connect and the number dialed is
considered “delayed” due to country blacklisting requirements.
32
BLACKLISTED
For X4, sent when a call fails to connect and the number dialed is
considered “blacklisted.”
33
FAX
A fax modem connection is established in a facsimile mode.
35
DATA
A data modem connection is established in a facsimile mode.
40
+MRR: 300
The modem has connected to the line at 300 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
44
+MRR: 1200/75
The V.23 backward channel carrier is detected and carrier reporting
is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
45
+MRR: 75/1200
The V.23 forward channel carrier is detected and carrier reporting is
enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
46
+MRR: 1200
The modem has connected to the line at 1200 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
47
+MRR: 2400
The modem has connected to the line at 2400 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
48
+MRR: 4800
The modem has connected to the line at 4800 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
49
+MRR: 7200
The modem has connected to the line at 7200 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
50
+MRR: 9600
The modem has connected to the line at 9600 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
51
+MRR: 12000
The modem has connected to the line at 12000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
52
+MRR: 14400
The modem has connected to the line at 14400 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
53
+MRR: 16800
The modem has connected to the line at 16800 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
54
+MRR: 19200
The modem has connected to the line at 19200 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
55
+MRR: 21600
The modem has connected to the line at 21600 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
56
+MRR: 24000
The modem has connected to the line at 24000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
57
+MRR: 26400
The modem has connected to the line at 26400 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
58
+MRR: 28800
The modem has connected to the line at 28800 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
59
CONNECT 16800
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 16800 bps
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
69
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
61
CONNECT 21600
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 21600 bps
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
62
CONNECT 24000
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 24000 bps
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
63
CONNECT 26400
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 26400 bps
and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
64
CONNECT 28800
The modem has connected to the line and either the line speed is
28800 bps and DCE speed reporting is enabled, or the DTE speed is
28800 bps and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
66
+DR: ALT
The modem has connected to the line in MNP Class 5 and +DR:
message reporting is enabled. (See S95, Wn, and Xn.)
67
+DR: V.42B
The modem has connected to the line in V.42 bis and +DR: message
reporting is enabled. (See S95, Wn, and Xn.)
69
+DR: NONE
The modem has connected to the line without data compression and
+DR: message reporting is enabled. (See S95, Wn, and Xn.)
70
+ER: NONE
The modem has connected to the line without any form of error
correction and the +ER: message reporting has been enabled. (See
S95, Wn, and Xn.)
77
+ER: LAPM
The modem has connected to the line in V.42 LAPM error correction
mode and +ER: message reporting has been enabled. (See S95,
Wn, and Xn.)
78
+MRR: 31200
The modem has connected to the line at 31200 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
79
+MRR: 33600
The modem has connected to the line at 33600 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
80
+ER: ALT
Sent when the modem has connected in the MNP mode of error
correction, and +ER: message reporting has been enabled. (See
S95, Wn, and Xn.)
83
LINE IN USE
The modem attempted to go off-hook when an extension was
already occupying the line.
84
CONNECT 33600
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 33600 bps
and the DTE speed reporting is enabled.
91
CONNECT 31200
The modem has connected to the line DTE speed is 31200 bps and
the modem is to report the DTE speed upon connecting.
134
+MCR: B103
The modem has connected to the line with Bell 103 modulation and
modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
135
+MCR: B212
The modem has connected to the line with Bell 212 modulation and
modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
136
+MCR: V21
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.21 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
137
+MCR: V22
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.22 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
138
+MCR: V22B
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.22 bis modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
139
+MCR: V23
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.23 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
70
User Guide
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
140
+MCR: V32
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.32 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
141
+MCR: V32B
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.32 bis modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
142
+MCR: V34
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.34 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
145
+MCR: V90
The modem has connected to the line with ITU-T V.90 modulation
and modulation reporting is enabled. (See +MR, S95 and Xn.)
150
+MRR: 32000
The modem has connected to the line at 32000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
151
+MRR: 34000
The modem has connected to the line at 34000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
152
+MRR: 36000
The modem has connected to the line at 36000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
153
+MRR: 38000
The modem has connected to the line at 38000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
154
+MRR: 40000
The modem has connected to the line at 40000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
155
+MRR: 42000
The modem has connected to the line at 42000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
156
+MRR: 44000
The modem has connected to the line at 44000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
157
+MRR: 46000
The modem has connected to the line at 46000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
158
+MRR: 48000
The modem has connected to the line at 48000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
159
+MRR: 50000
The modem has connected to the line at 50000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
160
+MRR: 52000
The modem has connected to the line at 52000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
161
+MRR: 54000
The modem has connected to the line at 54000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
162
+MRR: 56000
The modem has connected to the line at 56000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
165
CONNECT 32000
The modem has connected to the line at 32000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
166
CONNECT 34000
The modem has connected to the line at 34000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
167
CONNECT 36000
The modem has connected to the line at 36000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
168
CONNECT 38000
The modem has connected to the line at 38000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
169
CONNECT 40000
The modem has connected to the line at 40000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
170
CONNECT 42000
The modem has connected to the line at 42000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
71
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
171
CONNECT 44000
The modem has connected to the line at 44000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
172
CONNECT 46000
The modem has connected to the line at 46000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
173
CONNECT 48000
The modem has connected to the line at 48000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
174
CONNECT 50000
The modem has connected to the line at 50000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
175
CONNECT 52000
The modem has connected to the line at 52000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
176
CONNECT 54000
The modem has connected to the line at 54000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
177
CONNECT 56000
The modem has connected to the line at 56000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
178
CONNECT 230400
The modem has connected to the line, the DTE speed is 230400
bps, and DTE speed reporting is enabled.
180
CONNECT 28000
The modem has connected to the line at 28000 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
181
CONNECT 29333
The modem has connected to the line at 29333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
182
CONNECT 30667
The modem has connected to the line at 30667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
183
CONNECT 33333
The modem has connected to the line at 33333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
184
CONNECT 34667
The modem has connected to the line at 34667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
185
CONNECT 37333
The modem has connected to the line at 37333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
186
CONNECT 38667
The modem has connected to the line at 38667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
187
CONNECT 41333
The modem has connected to the line at 41333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
188
CONNECT 42667
The modem has connected to the line at 42667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
189
CONNECT 45333
The modem has connected to the line at 45333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
190
CONNECT 46667
The modem has connected to the line at 46667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
191
CONNECT 49333
The modem has connected to the line at 49333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
192
CONNECT 50667
The modem has connected to the line at 50667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
193
CONNECT 53333
The modem has connected to the line at 53333 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
194
CONNECT 54667
The modem has connected to the line at 54667 bps and DCE speed
reporting is enabled.
72
User Guide
Table 4. Modem result codes (continued)
Numeric
Result code
Description
195
+MRR: 28000*
The modem has connected to the line at 28000 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
196
+MRR: 29333*
The modem has connected to the line at 29333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
197
+MRR: 30667*
The modem has connected to the line at 30667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
198
+MRR: 33333*
The modem has connected to the line at 33333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
199
+MRR: 34667*
The modem has connected to the line at 34667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
200
+MRR: 37333*
The modem has connected to the line at 37333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
201
+MRR: 38667*
The modem has connected to the line at 38667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
202
+MRR: 41333*
The modem has connected to the line at 41333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
203
+MRR: 42667*
The modem has connected to the line at 42667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
204
+MRR: 45333*
The modem has connected to the line at 45333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
205
+MRR: 46667*
The modem has connected to the line at 46667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
206
+MRR: 49333*
The modem has connected to the line at 49333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
207
+MRR: 50667*
The modem has connected to the line at 50667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
208
+MRR: 53333*
The modem has connected to the line at 53333 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
209
+MRR: 54667*
The modem has connected to the line at 54667 bps and carrier
reporting is enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
Notes:
1. See Vn for result code selection, i.e., short form (result code) or verbose/extended (result message).
2. See Wn for extended connect message control.
3. See S95 for extended result code enabling options (which override some Wn commands).
4. See Xn for extended result code subset enabling options.
5. See +MR for modulation reporting control.
S registers
S registers are information storage areas inside the modem. The AT command set uses the S registers to
configure modem options. Some S registers have default settings. These are usually adequate for normal
modem operations. In special circumstances, however, you may need to change some defaults.
To read or change the value of an S register, begin the command with the letters AT.
To read the value of an S register, use the command ATSr? where r is a register number 0-110. For example,
to read the value of S register 0, type ATS0? and press Enter.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
73
To change the value of an S register, use the command ATSr=n where r is a register number 0-110, and
n is the new value you want to assign. For example, to change the value of S0 register to 20 rings, type
ATS0=20 and press Enter.
Refer to the following table of S registers:
Table 5. S registers
Register
Description
Range
Units
S0
Number of Rings to Automatic
Answer.
0-255
Rings
S1
Ring Counter
0-255
Rings
S2
Escape Character
0-255 ASCII Decimal
ASCII
S3
Line Termination Character
0-127 ASCII Decimal
ASCII
S4
Response Formatting
Character
0-127 ASCII Decimal
ASCII
S5
Command Line Editing
Character
0-32 ASCII Decimal
ASCII
S6
Wait Time for Dial Tone Before
Blind Dialing, or After “W” Dial
Modifier
2-255
s
S7
Wait Time for Carrier After
Dial, for Silence, or for Dial
Tone After “W” Modifier
1-255
s
S8
Pause Time for Dial Delay
Modifier (,)
0-255
s
S10
Carrier Loss Disconnect Time
1-255
0.1s
S11
DTMF Tone Duration
50-255
0.001s
S12
Escape Prompt Delay
0-255
0.02s
S18
Test Timer
0-255
s
S29
Flash Dial Modifier Time (!)
0-255
10ms
S30
Disconnect Inactivity Timer
0-255
10s
S46
Data Compression Control
136 (no compression) or 138
(compression)
S95
Result Code Messages
Control:
Bit 0 CONNECT result
code indicates DCE speed
instead of DTE speed.
Bit 1 Reserved.
Bit 2 Enable
+MCR:XXXX result code
(XXXX=modulation) and
+MRR:XXXX result code
(XXXX=rate). (See +ER.).
Bit 3 Enable
+ER:XXXX result code
(XXXX=protocol identifier).
(See +ER.).
Bit 4 Reserved.
74
User Guide
Table 5. S registers (continued)
Register
Description
Range
Units
Bit 5 Enable +DR result
code (XXXX=compression
type). (See +DR.).
Bits 6-7 Reserved.
Using dialup connection
If you sometimes have to dial in to one or more networks from remote sites, such as hotels or offices, you will
need to start by setting up in your computer a profile for each site you dial from and a profile for each network
you dial in to. For details on setting up network and dial-up connections, refer to Windows online help.
Dialup connections
To use the built-in modem, start Access Connections.
For Windows 7: To start the Access Connections wizard, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on
page 23, and follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP: To start the Access Connections wizard, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Access Connections, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Notes: Before you start setting up dialup connections by using Access Connections, obtain either of the
following from your Internet service provider (ISP) or network administrator.
• Dialer program provided by your ISP
OR
• Phone number to the access point
• User name and password
Access Connections, a connectivity assistant program, can easily enable one network adapter and disable
the other adapters on demand. After setting up your dialup connection, you can use the program to quickly
switch the network settings.
Dialing manually
If your computer is repeatedly unable to connect to your ISP or to a LAN, it is easier to dial an access number
manually. For details, refer to your Windows online help.
Note: You will need to have a dual jack to the same phone line or a “Y” splitter for your phone line so that
your computer and your telephone can share a line.
Modem use abroad
Different countries and regions follow different procedures and regulations regarding modem use. Be sure to
check with your hotel front desk or with the local telephone utility to learn the proper procedure for plugging
in and unplugging your modem and power cord.
DANGER
To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the cable to or disconnect the cable from the telephone
outlet on the wall during electrical storms.
Around the world there are dozens of plugs and jacks for phone connections. You can usually purchase an
adapter while in destination country, but adapter kits are available in your home country prior to your trip.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
75
Some countries support pulse dialing rather than tone dialing. To change dialing methods, refer to your
Windows online help.
Note: In many regions, you cannot use the built-in modem function until Lenovo has received approval from
the proper authorities.
Your built-in modem is a worldwide modem and can be used in any region where Postal Telegraph and
Telephone (PTT) type approval has been obtained. You can change the modem setting as needed for
the region where you use the modem.
For more information on the use of the built-in modem in a specific region, contact the Customer Support
Center in that region.
76
User Guide
Presentations and multimedia
Your computer comes with many features to increase the enjoyment of your computer and help you give
presentations with confidence.
Changing display settings
You can change the display settings, such as font size or color mode or numeric lock.
Font size
To make a font size larger, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display at the left.
3. Select the Medium or Larger radio button.
4. Click Apply. The change will take effect after you log off.
For Windows Vista:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Adjust font size (DPI) under Tasks at the left. If you are prompted for an administrator password
or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
3. Select the Larger scale (120DPI)- make text more readable check box.
4. Click OK. The change will take effect after the computer restarts. You are prompted to restart the
computer after you click OK or Apply.
For Windows XP:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties. The Display Properties window opens.
2. Click the Appearance tab.
3. Under Font Size, click Large Fonts or Extra Large Fonts.
4. Click Apply to apply the settings.
5. Click OK. If you are prompted to restart the computer after you click OK or Apply, the change will
take effect after the computer restarts.
Numeric lock
To change the numeric lock setting, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display at the left.
3. Click Change display settings.
4. Click Advanced settings, select the On Screen Display tab, and then click Num Lock Settings.
5. The setting window opens.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows Vista:
Chapter 2. Using your computer
77
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display Settings.
3. Click Advanced Settings, select the On Screen Display tab, and then click Num Lock Settings.
4. The setting window opens.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows XP:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties. The Display Properties window opens.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Click Advanced, select the On Screen Display tab, and then click Num Lock Settings.
4. The setting window opens.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Connecting a projector or external display
Attaching an external monitor
Your computer can support a maximum video resolution of up to 2048x1536 (with an external monitor
attached to the CRT connector) or up to 2560x1600 (with an external monitor attached to the DisplayPort
connector), provided that the external monitor also supports that resolution. For more details, refer to
the manuals provided with your monitor.
Note: As for ThinkPad W520 models, the CRT connector does not work in the DOS environment at NVIDIA
Optimus mode or Integrated Graphics mode, you need to change to Discrete Graphics mode to turn on
the CRT monitor. If there is no display to change the ThinkPad Setup setting, press F7 to switch to the
Discrete Graphics mode right after power-on.
You can set any resolution for either the computer display or the external monitor. When you use both at
the same time, the resolution of both is the same. If you set a higher resolution for the computer display,
you can see only part of the screen at a time. You can see other parts by moving the image with the
TrackPoint or another pointing device.
You can move the display output to the computer display, the external monitor, or both in the Display
Settings window (in Windows XP, Display Properties window).
Connecting an external monitor
To attach an external monitor, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet
2. Turn on the external monitor.
3. Change the display output location by pressing Fn+F7. This allows you to switch between viewing
output on the external display, the computer display, and both displays.
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, right-click on the desktop, then select Screen
resolution. Click the Detect button.
For Windows Vista:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor.
78
User Guide
3. If this is the first time the external monitor has been connected, the New Display Detected dialog box
opens. Select one of the following, and then click OK.
• Duplicate my desktop on all displays (mirrored)
• Show different parts of my desktop on each display (extended)
• Show my desktop on the external monitor only
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, the New Display Detected dialog box does
not open. For details, refer to the Windows online help.
For Windows XP:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet.
3. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
4. Change the display output location by pressing Fn+F7. This allows you to switch between viewing
output on the external display, the computer display, and both displays.
Notes:
• Do not change the display output location while a moving picture is being drawn, for example, while
playing a movie or a game, or viewing a business presentation. Close the application before changing the
display output location, or change the display mode before you open an MPEG file to play.
• If you are attaching an external monitor that supports only VGA mode (640x480 resolution), do not view
output on both the computer display and the external monitor. Doing so would cause the external monitor
screen to be scrambled and the output not to be displayed; in addition, it could cause damage to the
screen. Use the external monitor only.
• If the external TFT monitor you connect has an analog interface, flickers or ripples may appear on some
displays, such as the shutdown screen of Windows. This is caused by the external TFT monitor, and
cannot be fixed by adjusting the external TFT monitor or the computer side settings.
Setting the monitor types
To set your monitor type, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor.
3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button.
4. Set Resolution.
5. Click Advanced Settings.
6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is
correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
7. If more than two monitor types are displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP
Monitor.
8. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password
or provide confirmation.
9. Click the Driver tab.
10. Click Update Driver.
11. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device
drivers on my computer.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
79
12. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
13. Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor. If you cannot find your monitor in the list, stop the
installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor.
14. After updating the driver, click Close.
15. Click OK.
Note: To change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced
Settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors.
For Windows Vista:
Note: If you select Show different parts of my desktop on each display (extended), refer to “Using the
Extend desktop function” on page 83.
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
5. Click Display Settings. The Display Settings window opens.
6. Click Advanced Settings.
7. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is
correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
8. If more than two monitor types are displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP
Monitor.
9. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password
or provide confirmation.
10. Click the Driver tab.
11. Click Update Driver.
12. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device
drivers on my computer.
13. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
14. Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor. If you cannot find your monitor in the list, stop the
installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor.
15. After updating the driver, click Close.
16. Set Resolution and Colors in the Display Settings window.
17. Click OK.
For Windows XP:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
5. Click the Settings tab.
6. Click Advanced.
7. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is
correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
8. If more than two monitor types are displayed, select Default Monitor.
9. Click Properties.
80
User Guide
10. Click the Driver tab.
11. Click Update Driver. The Hardware Update Wizard appears.
12. Click No, not this time, and then click Next.
13. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
14. Select Don't search. I will choose the driver to install, and then click Next.
15. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
16. Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor. If you cannot find your monitor in the list, stop the
installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor.
17. After updating the driver, click OK to close the Properties window.
18. Set Colors and Screen area in the Display Properties window.
19. Click OK.
Considerations for attaching an external monitor
• When installing an operating system, you must install the display driver for your monitor that is supplied
with the computer, and the Monitor INF file that is supplied with the external monitor.
• If you set a resolution higher than the resolution you are using on the panel, and use a panel that does not
support that resolution, take advantage of the virtual screen function, which enables you to display only a
part of the high-resolution screen image your computer produces. You can see other parts of the image
by moving the screen with the TrackPoint or other pointing device.
• If the external monitor you are using is outdated, the resolution and the refresh rate may be limited.
• As for ThinkPad W520 models, the CRT connector does not work in the DOS environment at NVIDIA
Optimus mode or Integrated Graphics mode, you need to change to Discrete Graphics mode to turn on
the CRT monitor. If there is no display to change the ThinkPad Setup setting, press F7 to switch to
the Discrete Graphics mode right after power-on.
Using the DVI monitor
If your computer has one of the optional expansion units, a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, a ThinkPad
Mini Dock Series 3, or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), you can use the Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) monitor through the DVI connector of that unit.
Notes:
• The screen mode that can be used depends on the specifications of the DVI monitor.
• Before you attach the DVI monitor, make sure that the computer is attached to the expansion unit and
the system works properly.
To attach the DVI monitor, do as follows:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Connect the DVI monitor to the DVI connector of the expansion unit, and then connect the monitor
to an electrical outlet.
3. Turn on the DVI monitor and the computer. The system starts.
If the computer output does not appear on the DVI monitor, do as follows:
For a computer that supports NVIDIA Optimus Graphics:
1. Switch the Graphics Processing Unit (GPU) to High Performance Graphics. For more information about
GPU switching, refer to the help for ThinkPad Power Manager.
Note: If your computer is running Windows XP, you cannot switch the GPU.
2. Right-click on the desktop and select NVIDIA Control Panel. The NVIDIA Control Panel opens.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
81
3. In the Select a Task navigation pane at left under Display, click Set up multiple displays.
4. In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, right-click on the Verify your display configuration, and then select
either the Clone Mode or the Primary. In Windows XP, select a multi-display mode.
5. Click OK.
For a computer that has the Intel® display adapter:
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+F12. The Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for mobile window appears.
2. Select Digital Display, Intel Dual Display Clone, or Extended Desktop. If you select Digital Display,
the computer output appears on the DVI monitor only. If you select Intel Dual Display Clone or
Extended Desktop, the output appears both on the computer display and on the DVI monitor.
3. Click OK.
Considerations for attaching a DVI monitor
Connect the DVI monitor to the expansion unit, and turn it on before you turn on the computer. Otherwise
the system cannot recognize that the monitor is connected. If the option for enabling the DVI monitor in the
Display Properties window does not appear, try closing the window and opening it again. If the option still
does not appear, make sure that the connector of the monitor is attached firmly, and repeat the procedure
for attaching the monitor.
Using the DisplayPort connector
Your computer has a DisplayPort connector, the latest digital display interface for connection to various
external devices, such as CRT monitors, projectors, or even HDTV. This compact connector enables a
plug-and-play setup and supports adaptors that can plug into DVI, VGA, or HDMI ports.
Note: As for ThinkPad W520 models, the CRT connector does not work in the DOS environment at NVIDIA
Optimus mode or Integrated Graphics mode, you need to change to Discrete Graphics mode to turn on
the CRT monitor. If there is no display to change the ThinkPad Setup setting, press F7 to switch to the
Discrete Graphics mode right after power-on.
The DisplayPort connector of your computer supports audio as well as video streaming.
Setting up a presentation
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, it does not support Presentation Director, but the Fn+F7 or
Win+P key combination is available for switching display output to a connected projector.
Presentation Director provides an easy way to set up your computer to help you give presentations with
confidence, even when you are away from your office.
Use Presentation Director to adjust resolution settings and temporarily disable power management timers to
ensure an uninterrupted presentation.
Presentation Director has some predefined presentation schemes. To apply a presentation scheme, you can
use the Fn+F7 key combination.
To start Presentation Director, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Presentation Director, and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Projecting video
To display information and make presentations, you can attach a data projector to your computer. Attach the
data projector to the monitor connector on your computer.
Note: It may take several seconds before the projector displays the image. If you do not see your desktop
displayed after 60 seconds, try pressing Fn+F7 to switch between different display output locations.
82
User Guide
You can create a presentation scheme by following the instructions of the Presentation Director, with the
projector attached to your computer. You can save the scheme for a future presentation with the same
equipment.
Playing sound
Your projector might have one or more audio-input connectors. To project sound, you will need to attach the
combo audio jack on your computer to these connectors, using an audio cable (commercially available).
Using dual displays
Using the Extend desktop function
Your computer supports a function named the Extend desktop. With the Extend desktop function, you
can display output on both the computer display and an external monitor. You can also display different
desktop images on each monitor.
You can use the Extend desktop function without changing any settings. If the function does not work, refer
to “Enabling the Extend desktop function” on page 83 to enable it.
Considerations for using the Extend desktop function
• If you want to show DOS full-screen while in the Extend desktop mode, only the primary display shows
DOS; the other display is blacked out.
If your computer has the Intel display adapter, you can designate the other display as the primary display
by doing the following:
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+F12. The Intel CUI window opens.
2. Select Extended Desktop.
3. Change the setting to designate the primary display.
• When an application using the DirectDraw or the Direct3D is played in full-screen mode, it is shown
only on the primary display.
• You cannot use the display switching function when you are in the Extend desktop mode.
Enabling the Extend desktop function
To enable the Extend desktop function, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor.
3. Press Fn+F7, then select Extend.
To change the resolution for each monitor, do as follows:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
2. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
3. Select the Resolution of the primary display.
4. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the secondary display, the external display).
5. Select the Resolution of the secondary display.
6. Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch.
Note: You can set the monitors in any relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
7. Click OK to apply the changes.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
83
Note: To change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced
Settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors.
For Windows Vista:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor.
3. If this is the first time the external monitor has been connected, the New Display Detected dialog box
opens. Select Show different parts of my desktop on each display (extended), and then click OK.
To change the resolution for each monitor, do as follows:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display Settings. The Display Settings window opens.
3. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
4. Select the Resolution and the Colors of the primary display.
5. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the secondary display, the external display).
6. Select the Resolution and the Colors of the secondary display.
7. Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch.
Note: You can set the monitors in any relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
8. Click OK to apply the changes.
For Windows XP:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector; then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet.
3. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
5. Click the Settings tab, and click the Monitor-2 icon.
6. Select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box and click Apply. (If the Monitor
Settings window opens, click Yes.)
To change the resolution for each monitor, do as follows:
1. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
2. Select the color quality and the screen resolution of the primary display.
3. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the secondary display, the external display).
4. Select the color quality and the screen resolution of the secondary display.
5. Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch.
Note: You can set the monitors in any relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
6. Click OK to apply the changes.
Using the NVIDIA Optimus Graphics feature
Some ThinkPad notebooks support NVIDIA Optimus Graphics.
NVIDIA Optimus Graphics enables a dynamic switch, that is, a switch with no need to restart your computer
between High Performance and Energy Saving Graphics.
84
User Guide
Note: To use the DisplayPort feature or DVI monitor on the docking station, you need to switch to High
Performance Graphics.
Switching the Graphics Processing Unit
If your computer supports NVIDIA Optimus Graphics, the Graphics Processing Unit is switched automatically
depending on the settings of the power plan you use.
Note: If your computer is running Windows XP, you cannot switch the GPU.
Using a color profile
The display provides a color profile that can work with the Microsoft Image Color Management (ICM)
function. If the graphics software you are using is compatible with ICM, you can display a color image on
your monitor and match it with the same quality on another device, such as a scanner or a printer.
For details on Microsoft ICM, refer to the manuals provided with the Windows operating system.
Note: The color profile for ThinkPad LCD has been pre-installed in your computer already. If you need to
install a different color profile, see “Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7” on page
199. If you have measured and adjusted the color accuracy of your display by use of a color sensor, you
may also use the color profile created during that process.
Using audio features
Your computer is equipped with the following:
• Combo audio jack, 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) in diameter
• Built-in stereo speakers
• Built-in dual array digital microphone
Your computer also has an audio chip that enables you to enjoy various multimedia audio features:
• Compliant with Intel High Definition Audio.
• Recording and playback of PCM and WAV files in 16-bit or 24-bit format.
• Playback of a WAV file at a sample rate of 44.1KHz to 192 KHz.
• Playback of MIDI files through a Wave table synthesizer under Microsoft Windows operating systems.
• Playback of MP3 files through the Windows Media Player or a software MP3 player.
• Recording from various sound sources, such as a headset attached either to the combo audio jack of
your computer or to the microphone jack of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock
Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W).
Note: The combo audio jack does not support a conventional microphone.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
85
The following table shows which functions of the audio devices attached to the jacks on your computer or
docking station are supported.
Table 6. Audio feature list
Headset with a 3.5 mm
4-pole plug
Conventional headphone
Conventional microphone
Combo audio jack
Headphone and
microphone functions
supported
Headphone function
supported
Not supported
Headphone jack of the
docking station
Only headphone function
supported
Headphone function
supported
Not supported
Not supported
Microphone function
supported
Microphone function not
supported
Microphone jack of the
docking station
Not supported
Beam Forming feature
A built-in dual array digital microphone is mounted at the top of the display. Whereas a conventional
single-element microphone captures sounds from all around, the built-in dual array digital microphone is
designed to capture the sound from an exceptionally limited angle, through the combination of a specialized
microphone array with a capability of digital signal processing. Therefore the microphone captures sounds
from the area in front of the system clearly, but blocks out almost all the sounds from outside the capturing
range. Thus the speech of a user sitting in front of the system is input to the system without interference
from noise in the surrounding area. To record your speech most clearly, you should speak from directly in
front of the computer.
Configuring for sound recording
To configure the microphone for optimized sound recording, open the SmartAudio window as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound ➙ SmartAudio.
The SmartAudio window opens.
For Windows XP: Click Start ➙ Control Panel. Switch to Classic View and click SmartAudio. The
SmartAudio window opens.
Using an integrated camera
If your computer has an integrated camera, when you press Fn+F6 to open the Communications settings
window, the camera will be launched and the green camera-in-use indicator will turn on automatically. In
the Communications settings window, you can preview your video image and take a snapshot of your
current image.
You can also use the integrated camera with other programs that provide features such as photographing,
video capturing, and video conferencing. To use the integrated camera with other programs, open one of the
programs and start the photographing, video capturing, or video conferencing function. Then, the camera
will start automatically and the green camera-in-use indicator will turn on. For more information about using
the camera with a program, refer to the documentation that came with the program.
If you do not want the camera to be launched automatically when you press Fn+F6 or when you use a
program, press Fn+F6 to open the Communications settings window and click the Hide my camera image
button to disable the camera.
86
User Guide
Configuring camera settings
You can configure the camera settings to meet your needs, such as adjusting the quality of the video output.
To configure the camera settings, do the following:
1. Press Fn+F6. The Communications settings window opens.
2. Click the Manage Settings button. The Communication Utility window opens.
3. In the Communications Utility window, configure the camera settings depending on your individual
needs.
Adjusting the video output of your camera
You can adjust the quality of the video output of your camera by changing the settings for image quality and
frame rate in the camera property window. The following values are available:
Speed Priority: This is the default setting. It gives you a faster frame rate for the best real-time video
conferencing during the day. However, at night or in a dark environment, the image does not have the
best quality.
Balance: This gives you a balance between speed and image quality. The image obtained at night or in a
dark environment is better than with Speed Priority.
Image quality priority: This gives you a high-quality video and the best image at any time of the day. The
image is very clear even at night or in a dark environment, but at the expense of frame rate. The video
streaming may slow down.
Using the ThinkLight feature
Because your computer can travel with you, you might need to use it in less than perfect lighting conditions.
To illuminate the keyboard by turning on your computer, press Fn+PgUp.
Note: Avoid using your computer in dark conditions for prolonged periods. It is bad for your eyes.
Using the optical drive
Note: Your computer support only the MultiBurner driver.
MultiBurner drive
This drive can read DVD-ROM discs, DVD-R discs, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-RW discs, and all types of CDs,
such as CD-ROM discs, CD-RW discs, CD-R discs, and audio CDs. In addition, it can record on DVD-R
discs, DVD-RW discs, type II DVD-RAM discs, CD-RW standard and high speed discs, and CD-R discs.
Using the media card reader
Depending on the model, your computer may have an ExpressCard slot for a 34 mm-wide card, a media
card reader slot, or a smart card reader slot.
If your computer has a media card reader slot, it supports the following cards:
Chapter 2. Using your computer
87
• SD card
• SDHC card
• SDXC card
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
Notes:
• Your computer does not support the CPRM feature for the SD card.
• When transferring data to or from a flash media card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer
in sleep (standby) or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete. To do so might cause
damage to your data.
For more information on ExpressCards, smart cards, and flash media cards, refer to any of the following
topics:
•
“Inserting an ExpressCard, a flash media card, or a smart card” on page 88
•
“Removing an ExpressCard, a flash media card, or a smart card” on page 89
Inserting an ExpressCard, a flash media card, or a smart card
Attention: Do not insert an ExpressCard while the computer is in sleep (standby) mode or hibernation mode.
If you do, the computer may not respond when you try to resume using it.
Attention: Before you start installing any of the following cards, touch a metal table or a grounded metal
object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the card.
• 34 mm-wide ExpressCard
• Flash media card, such as an SD card, an SDHC card, an SDXC card, and a MultiMediaCard
• Smart card
For information about the location of the ExpressCard slot, flash media card reader slot, and smart card slot,
see “Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators” on page 1.
To insert a 34 mm-wide ExpressCard into the ExpressCard slot, do the following:
• Make sure that the card is correctly oriented.
• Push the slot cover, and insert the card into the slot with the notched edge facing upward. Then press the
card firmly into the connector.
To insert a flash media card into the 4-in-1 media card reader slot, do the following:
• Make sure that the card is correctly oriented.
• Insert the card firmly into the 4-in-1 media card reader slot. The card may stop before it is completely
installed into the slot.
To insert a smart card into the smart card slot, do the following:
• Make sure that the card is correctly oriented.
• Insert the card so that the metallic contact is up and goes in first. Insert the card firmly into the slot.
If the ExpressCard, flash media card, or smart card is not Plug and Play, do the following:
• For Windows 7:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
88
User Guide
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
4. From the Action menu, select Add legacy hardware. The Add Hardware Wizard starts.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
• For Windows Vista and Windows XP:
– Open Control Panel and switch to Classic view.
– Double-click the Add Hardware icon. The Add Hardware Wizard starts.
– Follow the instructions on the screen.
Removing an ExpressCard, a flash media card, or a smart card
Attention: Before removing a storage ExpressCard, such as a flash memory ExpressCard, a solid state
ExpressCard, or a memory card reader ExpressCard, from an ExpressCard slot, you must stop the
ExpressCard. Otherwise, data on the ExpressCard might be corrupted or lost.
Attention: Do not remove an ExpressCard while the computer is in sleep (standby) mode or hibernation
mode. If you do, the system will not respond when you try to resume operation.
For information about the location of the ExpressCard slot, flash media card reader slot, and smart card slot,
see “Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators” on page 1.
To remove an ExpressCard, a flash media card, or a smart card, do the following:
For Windows 7:
• Click the Show hidden icons in the task bar.
• Right-click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon.
• Select corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system.
• Press the card to eject it from your computer.
• Remove the card from your computer and store it safely for future use.
For Windows Vista and Windows XP:
• Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the task bar
• Select corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system.
• Press the card to eject it from your computer.
• Remove the card from your computer and store it safely for future use.
Note: If you do not remove the card from your computer after you eject the card from the Windows
operating system, the card can no longer be accessed. To access the card, you must remove it once,
then insert it again.
Chapter 2. Using your computer
89
90
User Guide
Chapter 3. You and your computer
This chapter provides you information about accessibility and traveling with your computer.
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
“Accessibility and comfort” on page 91
•
“Traveling with your computer” on page 94
Accessibility and comfort
Because your computer enables you to work in so many places, it is important that you remain attentive
to good posture, good lighting and proper seating. By keeping these considerations in mind, you can
improve performance and achieve greater comfort.
Lenovo is committed to providing the latest information and technology to our customers with disabilities.
Refer to our accessibility information which outlines our efforts in this area.
Ergonomic information
Working in the virtual office may mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Following some
simple rules will make things easier and bring you the maximum benefits of your computer. Keeping in mind
such basics as good lighting and proper seating, for example, can help you improve your performance
and achieve greater comfort.
Note: This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can
follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well.
General Posture: Below are some general recommendations for assuming a healthy working posture. It
is best to periodically make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort
caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent, short breaks from your work will also help
to prevent any minor discomfort associated with your working posture.
Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510-760 mm (20-30 inch). Avoid
glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
91
clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press Fn+Home or End
to adjust display brightness.
Head Position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position.
Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to
best suit your desired posture.
Arm and Hand Position: If available, utilize chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide
weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal)
position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys.
Leg Position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest.
What if you are traveling?
It may not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on
the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible.
Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, will help you maintain desirable levels of comfort
and performance.
Questions about vision?
ThinkPad notebook's visual display screens are designed to meet the highest standards and to provide you
with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Of course,
any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual
discomfort, consult a vision care specialist for advice.
Adjusting your computer to fit you
Because your computer enables you to work in so many places, it is important that you remain attentive
to good posture, good lighting and proper seating. Refer to the following tips to improve performance
and achieve greater comfort:
Active sitting and rest breaks: The longer you sit and work with your computer the more important it is
to observe your working posture. Following general recommendations for maintaining a healthy working
posture (see “Ergonomic information” on page 91) and practicing “active sitting” are the best ways to
avoid discomfort associated with your working postures. Making minor voluntary postural changes and
taking short frequent work breaks are the key ingredients for healthy computing. Your computer is a light
and mobile system; remember that it can easily be repositioned on your working surface to accommodate
many posture modifications you might wish to make.
Work area setup options: Familiarize yourself with all of your office furniture so that you know how to adjust
your work surface, seat, and other work tools to accommodate your preferences for comfort. If your work
area is not in an office setting, be sure to take special note of employing active sitting and utilizing work
breaks. Note that there are many ThinkPad product solutions available to help you modify and expand
your computer to best suit your needs. Access the following Web site to view some of these options:
http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html. Explore your options for docking solutions and
external products that can provide the adjustability and features that you want.
ThinkPad features that promote comfort: There are easy to use ThinkPad features that can help make
your computer more comfortable to use.
92
User Guide
Accessibility information
Lenovo is committed to providing people with disabilities greater access to information and technology.
As a result, the following information provides ways to help users that have hearing, vision, and mobility
limitations get the most out of their computer experience.
Assistive technologies enable users to access information in the most appropriate way. Some of these
technologies are already provided in your operating system, others can be purchased through vendors, or
accessed through the World Wide Web.
Assistive technologies
Some accessibility technologies are available through the Accessibility Options program. Depending
on your operating system, the number of accessibility options available varies. In general, accessibility
options enhance the way users with hearing, vision, or mobility limitations navigate and use their computer.
For example, some users might not have the fine motor skills required to use a mouse or select key
combinations. Other users might require larger fonts or high-contrast display modes. In some cases,
magnifiers and built-in speech synthesizers are available. For detailed information about each of these
features, consult the Microsoft help system.
To use the Accessibility Options program, do as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Ease of Access.
3. Click Ease of Access Center.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Accessibility Options.
This help system supports the accessibility features provided by your Windows operating system, screen
readers designed to operate in the Windows environment, and Windows keyboard navigation. For a
complete listing of Microsoft Windows Keyboard Guide, go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/enable/Products/altkeyboard.aspx
Screen reader technologies are primarily focused on software application interfaces, help systems, and a
variety of online documents. However, in the case where a screen reader cannot read documents, the
document must first go through a conversion process. One solution converts Adobe PDF files into a format
that is read by the screen-reader programs. This solution is a Web-based service provided by Adobe
Systems Incorporated. Through http://access.adobe.com, Adobe PDF documents can be converted to
HTML or plain text in many languages. One conversion options converts PDF documents on the Internet. A
second option enables users to submit the URL of an Adobe PDF file through e-mail to convert it to HTML or
ASCII text. Adobe PDF files on a local hard disk drive, local CD-ROM, or local area network (LAN) can also
be converted by attaching the Adobe PDF file to an e-mail message.
FullScreen Magnifier function
Some models support the FullScreen Magnifier function, which enlarges the active window and makes it
easier for you to use the computer display.
To enable the FullScreen Magnifier function, press Fn+Spacebar. The active window is magnified and the
FullScreen Magnifier icon is displayed in the system tray at bottom right of your screen. Then you can
change the zoom resolution. Click the FullScreen Magnifier icon and make your choice.
Chapter 3. You and your computer
93
To disable the FullScreen Magnifier function, click the FullScreen Magnifier icon and select Exit or press
Fn+Spacebar.
Traveling with your computer
When you travel abroad, your computer can help you feel more at home and at ease. With your own computer
and its files, you can be confident about gathering and offering information to clients and coworkers.
Attending to some important details that can help foreign travel go smoothly:
•
“Travel tips” on page 94
•
“Travel accessories” on page 94
Travel tips
Use the following travel tips to travel more confidently and efficiently with your computer.
1. While it is safe to allow your computer to go through the x ray machines at airport security stations, it is
important to keep your eyes on the computer at all times to prevent theft.
2. Consider bringing an airplane or automobile adapter for your computer.
3. Because you might need to use your computer in less than perfect lighting conditions, turn on the
ThinkLight by pressing Fn+PgUp to illuminate the keyboard.
4. If you carry an ac power adapter, detach the ac cord from it to avoid damaging the cord.
Note: If you use the ThinkLight, the battery life is slightly reduced.
Travel tips on airplanes
If you carry your computer into an airplane, check the travel tips.
Attention:
• For using onboard computer or wireless (such as Internet, Bluetooth, etc.) service, check the services
with the airline before boarding the airplane.
• If there are restrictions on the use of computers with the wireless feature on an airplane, you need to
disable it before boarding. To disable it, refer to the instructions in “Enabling or disabling the wireless
feature” on page 56.
Follow the tips below:
1. Be careful about the seat in front of you on airplanes. Angle your computer display so that it does not
get caught when the person in front of you leans back.
2. Remember to hibernate or turn off your computer when taking off.
Travel accessories
Here is a checklist of things to consider packing when you are going to be away from the office:
Travel Essentials
• ThinkPad ac power adapter
• External mouse, if you are accustomed to using one
• Ethernet cable
• Standard phone cable and modular jack (RJ-11)
• Extra battery, charged
94
User Guide
• A quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection
If you are traveling to another country you might want to consider these items
• An ac power adapter for the country that you are traveling to
• An adapter to connect to a phone line in that country
Other items you may wish to consider
• ThinkPad AC/DC Combo Adapter
• External storage device
• Phone line splitter, in case you need to dial manually or use your modem without disconnecting the
phone line
Chapter 3. You and your computer
95
96
User Guide
Chapter 4. Security
This chapter provides information about how to protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
•
“Attaching a mechanical lock” on page 97
•
“Using passwords” on page 97
•
“Hard disk security” on page 103
•
“Setting the security chip” on page 104
•
“Using a fingerprint reader” on page 105
•
“Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive” on page 109
•
“Using and understanding firewalls” on page 109
•
“Protecting data against viruses” on page 109
Attaching a mechanical lock
You can attach a mechanical lock to your computer, to help prevent it from being removed without your
permission.
Attach a mechanical lock to the keyhole of the computer; then secure the chain on the lock to a stationary
object. Refer to the instructions shipped with the mechanical lock.
Note: You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security
features. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance
of locking devices and security features.
Using passwords
By using passwords, you can help prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a
password, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at
the prompt. You cannot use the computer unless you type the correct password.
Make sure that only authorized individuals access your computer. Establishing different kinds of passwords
requires that other possible users know the proper passwords in order to access your computer or your data.
If this icon appears, enter Power-on password or Supervisor password.
If this icon appears, enter Hard disk password.
If this icon appears, enter Supervisor password.
Click on the items below to find out more about passwords and how to use them to protect your computer.
•
“Passwords and sleep (standby) mode” on page 98
•
“Power-on password” on page 98
•
“Hard disk passwords” on page 99
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
97
•
“Supervisor password” on page 101
Passwords and sleep (standby) mode
If you have set passwords and you put your computer into sleep (standby) mode by pressing Fn+F4, the
procedure for resuming operation is as follows:
• You are not prompted to type the password when resuming operation.
• If any hard disk or the solid state drive has a hard disk password, it is unlocked automatically when
you resume operation.
Typing passwords
If this icon appears, type a power-on password or a supervisor password.
If this icon appears, type a user hard disk password. If you want to type a master hard disk password,
do the following:
1. Press F1. The icon changes to this:
2. Now type the master hard disk password.
Note: To return to the first icon, press F1 again.
If this icon appears, type a supervisor password.
Note: You can press Backspace if you press a wrong key while you are typing your password.
Power-on password
You can set a power-on password to help protect your computer against access by unauthorized users.
If you set a power-on password, the password prompt appears on the screen whenever you turn on the
computer. You must enter the correct password to start using the computer.
Setting a power-on password
1. Print these instructions.
2. Save all open files, and exit all applications.
3. Turn your computer off and then turn it on again.
4. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
5. Select Security, using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu.
6. Select Password.
7. Select Power-on Password.
8. Choose your power-on password, and type your new password in the Enter New Password field.
Note: You can set the minimum length of a power-on password in the ThinkPad Setup menu. For
details, refer to “Security menu” on page 203.
9. Press Enter once to move to the next line. Retype the password you just entered to verify it.
10. Commit your password to memory and press Enter. A Setup Notice window is displayed.
98
User Guide
Note: You might want to note your power-on password in a safe place. Otherwise, if you forget it, you
have to take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the password
canceled.
11. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window.
Changing or removing the power-on password
To change the power-on password, follow the steps 1 through 9 above in “Setting a power-on password” on
page 98, typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup.
To change the password, do the following:
1. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password.
2. In the Enter New Password field, type the new power-on password; then retype the password you just
entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field.
3. Follow step 10 and step 11 above in “Setting a power-on password” on page 98 to change your
power-on password.
To remove the password, do the following:
1. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password.
2. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank.
3. Follow step 10 and step 11 above in “Setting a power-on password” on page 98 to remove your
power-on password.
Hard disk passwords
Two types of hard disk passwords help protect the information stored on the hard disk:
• User hard disk password
• Master hard disk password, which requires a user hard disk password
If a user hard disk password has been set, but no master hard disk password has been, the user must enter
the user hard disk password in order to gain access to files and applications on the hard disk.
The master hard disk password can be set and used only by a system administrator. Like a master key, it
enables the administrator to get access to any hard drive in a system. The administrator sets the master hard
disk password; and no one else knows it. Then the administrator sets a user hard disk password for each
computer in the network, and tells each user the password for his or her computer. The user can change the
user hard disk password as desired, but the administrator can still get access by using the master password.
Note: When a master hard disk password is set, only the administrator can remove the user hard disk
password.
Setting a hard disk password
1. Print these instructions.
2. Save all open files, and exit all applications.
3. Turn your computer off and then on again.
4. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
5. Select Security, using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu.
6. Select Password.
7. Select Hard Disk x Password, where x is the number of the hard disk drive for which you want to
set a password.
Chapter 4. Security
99
8. A Setup Confirmation window opens. You are prompted to select User or User + Master. Select User if
you want to set only one hard disk password. If you are an administrator or supervisor, you can select
User + Master to set two passwords. (The user can change the user password later.)
9. If you select User + Master, go to step 12.
10. If you select User only, a new-password window opens. Type your new password in the Enter New
Password field.
Notes:
• You can set the minimum length of a hard disk password in the ThinkPad Setup menu. For details,
refer to “Security menu” on page 203.
• If you set a hard disk password of over seven characters, the hard disk drive can be used only with a
computer that can recognize a hard disk password of over seven characters. If you then install the
hard disk drive in a computer that cannot recognize a hard disk password that contains more than
seven characters, you cannot get access to the drive.
11. Press Enter once to move to the next line. Retype the password you just entered to verify it. Go to
step 18 to complete the procedure.
12. If you select User + Master, a message window opens and prompts you to set up a user hard disk
password first. Click Continue.
13. A new hard disk user password window opens. Type your new password in the Enter New Password
field.
14. Press Enter once to move to the next line. Retype the password you just entered to verify it.
15. A message window opens and prompts you to set the master hard disk password. Click Continue.
16. A new master hard-disk password window opens. Type your new password in the Enter New
Password field.
17. Press Enter once to move to the next line. Retype the password you just entered to verify it.
18. Commit your password to memory and press Enter. A Setup Notice window is displayed.
Attention: You might want to note your passwords and keep them in a safe place. Otherwise, if
you forget the user-only password, or both user and master passwords, Lenovo cannot reset your
passwords or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a
marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee
will be charged for parts and service.
19. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window.
The next time you turn on your computer, you will have to type the user or master hard disk password in
order to start your computer and get access to your operating system.
Changing or removing a hard disk password
Follow steps 1 through 7 in “Setting a hard disk password” on page 99 above, typing your password to get
access to the ThinkPad Setup.
To change or remove the User only hard disk password, do as follows:
• To change the hard disk password, type the current password in the Enter Current Password field. Then
type the new password in the Enter New Password field, and retype the password you just entered to
verify it in the Confirm New Password field. Press Enter, and a Setup Notice window is displayed. Press
F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window. The user hard disk password will be changed.
• To remove the hard disk password, type the current password in the Enter Current Password field.
Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank, and press Enter. A
100
User Guide
Setup Notice window is displayed. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window. The user hard
disk password will be removed.
To change or remove the User + Master hard disk password, select User HDP or Master HDP.
If you choose User HDP, do one of the following:
• To change the user hard disk password, type the current user hard disk password or the current master
hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field. Then type the new user hard disk password
in the Enter New Password field, and retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm
New Password field. Press Enter, and a Setup Notice window is displayed. Press F10 to exit from the
Setup Notice window. The user hard disk password will be changed.
• To remove the user hard disk password, type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current
Password field. Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank, and
press Enter. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window. Both
the user and master hard disk passwords will be removed.
If you choose Master HDP, do one of the following:
• To change the master hard disk password, type the current master hard disk password in the Enter
Current Password field. Then type the new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password
field, and retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field. Press
Enter, and a Setup Notice window is displayed. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window. The
master hard disk password will be changed.
• To remove the master hard disk password, type the current master hard disk password in the Enter
Current Password field. Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank,
and press Enter. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window.
Both the user and master hard disk passwords will be removed.
Supervisor password
The supervisor password protects the system information stored in the ThinkPad Setup. Without it, no one
can change the configuration of the computer. It provides the following security features:
• If a supervisor password is set, a password prompt appears when you try to start the ThinkPad Setup.
Unauthorized users cannot get access to configuration data.
• The system administrator can use the supervisor password to get access to a computer even if the user of
that computer has set a power-on password. The supervisor password overrides the power-on password.
• If both a supervisor password and a power-on password are set, you can do the following only if you
have the supervisor password:
– Deleting the power-on password
– Changing or deleting the supervisor password
– Enabling or disabling the Wake on LAN and Flash over LAN features
– Enabling or disabling the Internal Network Option ROM feature
– Changing date and time
– Enabling or disabling the Lock UEFI BIOS Settings feature
– Enabling or disabling the Password at unattended boot
– Specifying the minimum length for power-on passwords and hard disk passwords
– Changing the setting for the security chip
– Enabling or disabling the Boot Device List F12 Option
– Enabling or diabling the Boot Order Lock
Chapter 4. Security
101
– Enabling or disabling the Flash BIOS Updating by End-Users feature
– Enabling or disabling the Internal Network device
– Enabling or disabling the Internal Wireless device
– Enabling or disabling the Internal Bluetooth device
– Enabling or disabling the Internal Wireless WAN device
– Enabling or disabling the Security mode
– Enabling or disabling the fingerprint reader priority
– Erasing the fingerprint data
Notes:
• The system administrator can set the same supervisor password on many ThinkPad notebooks to make
administration easier.
• By enabling the Lock UEFI BIOS Settings in the Password menu when you set the supervisor password,
you make it impossible for anyone but you to make changes.
Setting a supervisor password
Only a system administrator will be able to apply this procedure.
1. Print these instructions.
2. Save all open files, and exit all applications.
3. Turn your computer off and then turn it on again.
4. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
5. Select Security, using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu.
6. Select Password.
7. Select Supervisor Password.
8. A window opens that prompts you to enter a new password.
9. Choose your supervisor password and type it in the Enter New Password field; then press Enter.
10. Press Enter to move to the next line. Retype the password you just entered to verify it.
11. Commit your password to memory and press Enter. A Setup Notice window is displayed.
Attention: You might want to note your password and keep it in a safe place. If you forget your
supervisor password, Lenovo can not reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo
reseller or a Lenovo marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is
required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service.
12. Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window.
The next time you open the ThinkPad Setup, you will be prompted to type your password to proceed.
Changing or removing the supervisor password
To change or remove the supervisor password, follow steps 1 through 8 above in “Setting a supervisor
password” on page 102, typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup.
To change the password, do the following:
1. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password.
2. In the Enter New Password field, type the new supervisor password; then retype the password you just
entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field.
102
User Guide
3. Follow step 11 and step 12 above in “Setting a supervisor password” on page 102 to change your
supervisor password.
To remove the password, do the following:
1. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password.
2. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields in blank.
3. Follow step 11 and step 12 above in “Setting a supervisor password” on page 102 to remove your
supervisor password.
Hard disk security
Your computer supports an enhanced security solution for solid state drive or hard disk drive. To protect
passwords from unauthorized security attacks, several of the latest technologies and algorithms are
integrated into UEFI BIOS and hardware design of ThinkPad notebooks.
To maximize security, do the following:
1. Set a power-on password as well as a hard disk password for your internal solid state drive or hard disk
drive. Refer to the procedures in “Power-on password” on page 98 and “Hard disk passwords” on page
99. For security, a longer password is recommended.
2. To provide reliable security for UEFI BIOS, use the security chip and a security application with a Trusted
Platform Module management feature. Refer to “Setting the security chip” on page 104.
Note: Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Vista support TPM management feature.
3. If a Disk Encryption hard disk drive and Encryption solid state drive is installed in your computer, be sure
to protect the contents of your computer memory from unauthorized access by use of drive encryption
software, such as Microsoft Windows BitLocker® Drive Encryption in Windows 7 and Windows Vista.
Refer to “Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption” on page 103.
4. Before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer, make sure to delete data stored on it. Refer to
“Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive” on page 109.
Notes: The following drives can be protected by UEFI BIOS:
• The hard disk drive built into your computer.
• The hard disk drive installed in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption
To help protect your computer from being subject to unauthorized access, be sure to use drive encryption
software, such as Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption.
Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption is an integral security feature of Windows 7 and Windows Vista. It is
supported in Ultimate and Enterprise editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista. It can help you protect the
operating system and data stored in your computer data, even if your computer is lost or stolen. BitLocker
works by encrypting all user and system files, including the swap and hibernation files.
BitLocker uses a Trusted Platform Module to provide enhanced protection for your data and to ensure early
boot component integrity. A compatible TPM is defined as a V1.2 TPM.
To check the BitLocker status, do the following:
• For Windows 7: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ System and Security ➙ BitLocker Drive Encryption.
Chapter 4. Security
103
• For Windows Vista: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Security ➙ BitLocker Drive Encryption.
For details about Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption, go to the Help and Support for Windows 7 or
Windows Vista, or search for “Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Step-by-Step Guide” on
Microsoft web site.
Disk Encryption hard disk drive and Encryption solid state drive
Some models contain the Disk Encryption hard disk drive or Encryption solid state drive. This feature
helps to protect your computer against security attacks on media, NAND flash or device controllers by use
of a hardware encryption chip. For the efficient use of the encryption feature, be sure to set a hard disk
password for the internal storage device.
Setting the security chip
Strict security requirements are imposed on network client computers that transfer confidential information
electronically. Depending on the options you ordered, your computer might have an embedded security chip,
a cryptographic microprocessor. With the security chip and Client Security Solution, you can do the following:
• Protect your data and system
• Strengthen access controls
• Secure communications
Setting the Security Chip
The choices offered in the Security Chip submenu under the Security menu of the ThinkPad Setup are
as follows:
• Security Chip: activate, inactivate, or disable the Security Chip.
• Security Reporting Options: enable or disable each Security Reporting Option.
• Clear Security Chip: clear the encryption key.
Notes:
1. Be sure that the Supervisor password has been set in the ThinkPad Setup. Otherwise anyone can
change the settings for the Security Chip.
2. If you are using Client Security Solution, handle the Security Chip as follows:
• Do not clear the Security Chip. If you do, the functions assigned to the keys will be erased.
• Do not disable the Security Chip. If you do, Client Security Solution will not work.
3. If the Security Chip is removed or replaced, or a new one has been added, the computer will not start.
You will hear 4 cycles of 4 beeps each, or you see error message 0176 or 0192.
4. If the Security Chip is inactive or disabled, Clear Security Chip will not be displayed.
5. When you clear the Security chip, be sure to turn your computer off and then turn it on again after you
set the Security chip to Active. Otherwise, the choice of Clear Security Chip is not displayed.
To set an item in the Security Chip submenu:
• Print these instructions. To set the Security Chip, you must turn your computer off and then on again.
• Save all open files, and exit all applications.
• Turn your computer off and then turn it on again.
• When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
• Using the cursor keys, move to Security. The Security menu opens.
• Using the cursor keys, move to Security Chip, and press Enter. The Security Chip submenu opens.
104
User Guide
• Using the cursor keys, move to an item you want to set. When the item you want is highlighted, press
Enter.
• Set the items you want to set.
• Press F10 to exit.
• Click Yes in the Setup Confirmation window.
To set the Security Chip, you have to open the Client Security Solution, and follow the instructions on
the screen.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on your system. To
configure the security chip, you need to download the latest version of Client Security Solution from the
Lenovo Web site. To download Client Security Solution, go to http://support.lenovo.com. Then follow
the instructions on the screen.
Using a fingerprint reader
Depending on the options you ordered, your computer may have an integrated fingerprint reader. By
enrolling your fingerprint and associating it with a power-on password, a hard disk password, or both
passwords beforehand, you can start the computer, log on to the system, and enter the ThinkPad Setup by
swiping your finger over the reader, without typing a password. Thus fingerprint authentication can replace
passwords and enable simple and secure user access.
For more advanced security, Client Security Solution can be installed. The software is compatible with a
variety of user authentication mechanisms, such as those involving fingerprint authentication. This fingerprint
reader can work with the software.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it.
Enrolling your fingerprint
1. Turn on your computer.
2. To start Lenovo Fingerprint software, refer to “Fingerprint Software” on page 25.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to enroll your fingerprint. For details, refer to the Help for the
program.
Chapter 4. Security
105
LED behavior of the fingerprint reader
Table 7. LED behavior list_fingerprint reader
Indicator
Description
LED blinks green.
The fingerprint is being authenticated or has been
authenticated.
LED is solid green.
The fingerprint reader is ready to swipe.
LED blinks amber.
The fingerprint could not be authenticated.
Swiping your finger over the reader
To swipe your finger over the reader, do as follows:
1. Place the ball of your finger, that is, the central part of the fingerprint, on the small circle above the
reader. Make sure that the entire top joint of the finger is on the reader.
106
User Guide
2. Apply light pressure and swipe your finger across the reader in one smooth motion.
Logging on to the system
After you enroll your fingerprint, log on to the system, as follows:
1. Set a power-on password or a hard disk password, or both.
2. Turn your computer off and then on again.
3. When prompted, swipe your finger over the reader.
4. On request, type your power-on password, your hard disk password, or both. The enrolled fingerprint is
now associated with your power-on password, your hard disk password, or both.
The next time you start the computer, you can log on to the system by swiping your finger over the
reader once.
Attention: If you always use your fingerprint to log on to the system, you may forget your password. Write
down your password, and keep it in a safe place. If you forget it and for some reason you cannot swipe
your finger across the reader, for example, if you injure that finger, you cannot start the computer or change
the password.If you forget your power-on password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized
servicer or a marketing representative to have the password canceled.
If you forget your hard disk password, Lenovo cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard
disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the
hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service.
Setting the fingerprint reader
If you want to change the settings of the fingerprint reader, follow the procedure below.
The fingerprint submenu under the Security menu of the ThinkPad Setup offers the following choices:
• Predesktop Authentication: Enable or disable fingerprint authentication before the operating system
is loaded.
• Reader Priority: Define the priority for fingerprint readers if an external fingerprint reader is attached.
• Security Mode: Specify the settings of the security mode.
• Password Authentication: Enable or disable password authentication.
Note: This item appears if High security mode is selected.
Chapter 4. Security
107
• Reset Fingerprint Data: By choosing this item, you can erase all of the fingerprint data stored in either
the internal or external fingerprint reader.
To set an item in the fingerprint submenu:
1. Print these instructions. To configure the fingerprint reader, you must turn your computer off and
then on again.
2. Save all open files, and exit all applications.
3. Turn your computer off and then on again.
4. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
5. Using the cursor keys, move to Security, and press Enter. The Security menu opens.
6. Using the cursor keys, move to Fingerprint, and press Enter. The Fingerprint submenu opens.
7. Using the cursor keys, move to an item you want to set. When that item is highlighted, press Enter.
8. Set the items you want to set.
9. Press F10 to exit.
10. In the Setup Confirmation window, select Yes.
Care for the fingerprint reader
The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly:
• Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard, pointed object.
• Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard.
• Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger.
If you notice any of the following conditions, gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free
cloth:
• The surface of the reader is dirty or stained.
• The surface of the reader is wet.
• The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint.
If your finger has any of the following conditions, you may not be able to register or authenticate it:
• Your finger is wrinkled.
• Your finger is rough, dry, or injured.
• Your finger is very dry.
• Your finger is stained with dirt, mud, or oil.
• The surface of your finger is very different from when you enrolled your fingerprint.
• Your finger is wet.
• A finger is used that has not been enrolled.
To improve the situation, try the following:
• Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers.
• Enroll and use a different finger for authentication.
• If your hands are too dry, apply lotion to them.
108
User Guide
Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive
As computers spread into every corner of life, they process more and more information. The data on your
computer, some of which is sensitive, is stored on a storage device, either a hard disk drive or solid state
drive. Before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer, make sure to delete data stored on it.
Handing your computer over to someone else without deleting the loaded software, such as operating
systems and application software, may even violate License Agreements. You are advised to check the
terms and conditions of those Agreements.
There are methods that seem to delete the data:
• Move the data to the recycle bin, and then choose the Empty recycle bin command.
• Use the Delete command.
• Format your hard disk drive or solid state drive, using the software for initializing it.
• Using the recovery program, provided by Lenovo, bring the hard disk drive or the solid state drive back
to factory-ship state.
These operations, however, only change the file allocation of the data; they do not delete the data itself. In
other words, the data retrieval processing is disabled under an operating system such as Windows. The
data is still there, even though it seems to be lost. Thus, it is sometimes possible to read the data by use of
special software for data recovery. There is a risk that people of bad faith may read and misuse the critical
data on hard disk drives or solid state drives for unexpected purposes.
To prevent leakage of data, it becomes very important that you take responsibility for deleting all the data
from the hard disk drive or solid state drive when you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can
destroy the data physically by smashing the hard disk drive with a hammer, or magnetically by means of
strong magnetic power, thus making the data unreadable. But we recommend that you make use of the
software (payware) or service (pay service) specifically developed for the purpose.
For disposing of data on the hard disk drive, Lenovo provides the Secure Data Disposal tool. To download
the tool, go to the Lenovo Web site at http://support.lenovo.com.
Note: Running the application will take a couple of hours.
If Encryption solid state drive or Disk Encryption hard disk drive is supported and installed in your computer,
you can logically dispose of all the data on a device in a very short time by erasing the cryptographic key.
The data encrypted with the old key is not physically erased but remains on the disk; however, it cannot be
decrypted without the old key. This feature is enabled by the ThinkPad Setup Menu Extension Utility and is
available as a menu item in the ThinkPad Setup.
Using and understanding firewalls
If your system is preintalled with a firewall program, it protects against computer Internet security threats,
unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy.
For more information about how to use the firewall program, refer to the on-line help that comes with
the program.
Protecting data against viruses
Your computer is preinstalled with an antivirus program so you can detect and eliminate viruses. The
antivirus program is designed to help you detect and eliminate viruses.
Chapter 4. Security
109
Lenovo provides a full version of antivirus software on your computer with a free 30-day subscription. After
30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus software updates.
For more information about how to use your antivirus software, refer to the help system of your antivirus
software.
110
User Guide
Chapter 5. Recovery overview
This chapter provides information about the recovery solutions provided by Lenovo.
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
“Creating and using recovery media” on page 111
•
“Performing backup and recovery operations” on page 113
•
“Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace” on page 114
•
“Creating and using a rescue medium” on page 115
•
“Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers” on page 116
•
“Solving recovery problems” on page 117
Notes:
1. There are a variety of methods to choose from when considering how to recover in the event of a
software- or hardware-related problem. Some methods vary depending on the type of your operating
system.
2. The product on the recovery media may be used only for the following purposes:
• Restore the product preinstalled on your computer
• Reinstall the product
• Modify the product using the Additional Files
Notes: To prevent potential performance risks or unexpected behavior that might be caused by the new
hard disk drive technology, it is recommended that you use one of the following back-up software programs:
•
ThinkVantage Rescue and Recovery version 4.23 or later (for Windows XP and Windows Vista), 4.3 or
later (for Windows 7)
• Symantec Norton Ghost version 15 or later
Notes: To use this program, do the following:
1. Click Start ➙ Run. The Run window opens.
2. Type cmd in the field. Then click OK.
3. Type ghost -align=1mb and press Enter.
•
Acronis True Image 2010 or later
•
Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Suit or later, Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Home or later
Creating and using recovery media
You can use recovery media to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings. Recovery media
are useful if you transfer the computer to another area, sell the computer, recycle the computer, or put the
computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed. As a precautionary measure,
it is important to create recovery media as early as possible.
Note: The recovery operations you can perform using recovery media vary depending on the operating
system from which the recovery media were created. The recovery media might contain a boot medium
and a data medium. Your Microsoft Windows license permits you to create only one data medium, so it is
important that you store the recovery media in a safe place after you have made them.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
111
Creating recovery media
This section provides instructions on how to create recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system.
Note: On the Windows 7 operating system, you can create recovery media using discs or external USB
storage devices. On the Windows Vista and Windows XP operating systems, you can create recovery media
using only discs, so this operation is also called “creating Product Recovery discs”.
• To create recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo
ThinkVantage Tools ➙ Factory Recovery Disks. Then, follow the instructions on the screen.
• To create Product Recovery discs on the Windows Vista operating system, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Create Product Recovery Media. Then, follow the instructions on the screen.
• To create Product Recovery discs on the Windows XP operating system, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙
ThinkVantage ➙ Create Recovery Media. Then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Using recovery media
This section provides instructions on how to use recovery media on different operating systems.
• On the Windows 7 operating system and the Windows Vista operating system, you can use recovery
media to restore the computer to the factory default settings only. You can use recovery media to put the
computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed.
Attention: When you use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings, all the
files currently on the hard disk drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings.
To use recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system or the Windows Vista operating system,
do the following:
1. Depending on the type of your recovery media, connect the boot medium (memory key or other USB
storage device) to the computer, or insert the boot disc into the optical drive.
2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Startup Device
Menu opens, release the F12 key.
3. Select the desired startup device and press Enter. The restore process begins.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the operation.
Notes:
1. After restoring your computer to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device drivers
for some devices. See “Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers” on page 116.
2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover
or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works applications, you must use the Microsoft Office
CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft
Office or Microsoft Works.
• On the Windows XP operating system, you can use Product Recovery discs to restore your computer to
the factory default settings, perform a custom factory recovery, or perform other rescue and recovery
operations such as rescuing individual files. You will be given the option to enter the Rescue and Recovery
workspace and choose from a variety of recovery operations.
Attention: When you use Product Recovery discs to restore the computer to the factory default settings,
all the files currently on the hard disk drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings.
During the restore process, you will be given the option to save one or more files currently on the hard
disk drive to other media before the data is deleted.
To use Product Recovery discs on the Windows XP operating system, do the following:
112
User Guide
1. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Startup Device
Menu opens, release the F12 key.
2. Insert the boot disc into the optical drive.
3. Select the optical drive with the boot disc as the startup device and press Enter. After a short delay,
the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens.
4. On the Rescue and Recovery menu, click Restore your system.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen. Insert the appropriate Product Recovery disc when prompted.
Performing backup and recovery operations
The Rescue and Recovery program enables you to back up all your hard disk drive contents including the
operating system, data files, software programs, and personal settings. You can designate where the
Rescue and Recovery program stores the backup:
• In a protected area of your hard disk drive
• On the secondary hard disk drive if a secondary hard disk drive is installed in your computer
• On an attached external USB hard disk drive
• On a network drive
• On recordable discs (a recordable optical drive is required for this option)
After you have backed up the contents on the hard disk drive, you can restore the complete contents of the
hard disk drive, restore only the selected files, or restore only the Windows operating system and applications.
Performing a backup operation
This section provides instructions on how to perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery
program on different operating systems.
• To perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows 7 operating
system, do the following:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools ➙
Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens.
2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow.
3. Click Back up your hard drive and select backup operation options. Then, follow the instructions on
the screen to complete the backup operation.
• To perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows Vista operating
system or the Windows XP operating system, do the following:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Rescue and Recovery.
The Rescue and Recovery program opens.
2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery ➙ Back
up your hard drive, and select backup operation options.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the backup operation.
Performing a recovery operation
This section provides instructions on how to perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery
program on different operating systems.
• To perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows 7 operating
system, do the following:
Chapter 5. Recovery overview
113
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools ➙
Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens.
2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow.
3. Click the Restore your system from a backup icon.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation.
• To perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows Vista operating
system or the Windows XP operating system, do the following:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Rescue and Recovery.
The Rescue and Recovery program opens.
2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery.
3. Click the Restore your system from a backup icon.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation.
For more information about performing a recovery operation from the Rescue and Recovery workspace, see
“Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace” on page 114.
Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace
The Rescue and Recovery workspace resides in a protected, hidden area of your hard disk drive that
operates independently from the Windows operating system. This enables you to perform recovery
operations even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. You can perform the following recovery
operations from the Rescue and Recovery workspace:
• Rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup
The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to locate files on your hard disk drive and transfer
them to a network drive or other recordable media, such as a USB device or a disc. This solution is
available even if you did not back up your files or if changes were made to the files since your last backup
operation. You can also rescue individual files from a Rescue and Recovery backup located on your local
hard disk drive, a USB device, or a network drive.
• Restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup
If you have backed up your hard disk drive using the Rescue and Recovery program, you can restore the
hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup, even if you cannot start the Windows operating
system.
• Restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings
The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to restore the complete contents of your hard disk drive
to the factory default settings. If you have multiple partitions on your hard disk drive, you have the option
to restore the factory default settings to the C: partition and leave the other partitions intact. Because the
Rescue and Recovery workspace operates independently from the Windows operating system, you can
restore the factory default settings even if you cannot start the Windows operating system.
Attention: If you restore the hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or restore the hard disk
drive to the factory default settings, all files on the primary hard disk drive partition (usually drive C:) will be
deleted in the recovery process. If possible, make copies of important files. If you are unable to start the
Windows operating system, you can use the rescue files feature of the Rescue and Recovery workspace to
copy files from your hard disk drive to other media.
To start the Rescue and Recovery workspace, do the following:
1. Make sure the computer is turned off.
2. Repeatedly press and release the F11 key when turning on the computer. When you hear beeps or
see a logo screen, release the F11 key.
114
User Guide
3. If you have set a Rescue and Recovery password, type your password when prompted. The Rescue
and Recovery workspace opens after a short delay.
Note: If the Rescue and Recovery workspace fails to open, see “Solving recovery problems” on
page 117.
4. Do one of the following:
• To rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup, click Rescue files and follow the
instructions on the screen.
• To restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or to restore your hard disk drive
to the factory default settings, click Restore your system and follow the instructions on the screen.
For more information about the features of the Rescue and Recovery workspace, click Help.
Notes:
1. After restoring your hard disk drive to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device
drivers for some devices. See “Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers” on page 116.
2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover
or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works applications, you must use the Microsoft Office
CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft
Office or Microsoft Works.
Creating and using a rescue medium
With a rescue medium, such as a disc or a USB hard disk drive, you can recover the computer from failures
that prevent you from gaining access to the Rescue and Recovery workspace on your hard disk drive.
Notes:
1. The recovery operations you can perform using a rescue medium vary depending on the operating
system.
2. The rescue disc can be started in all types of optical drives.
Creating a rescue medium
This section provides instructions on how to create a rescue medium on different operating systems.
• To create a rescue medium on the Windows 7 operating system, do the following:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools ➙
Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens.
2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow.
3. Click the Create Rescue Media icon. The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens.
4. In the Rescue Media area, select the type of the rescue medium you want to create. You can create
a rescue medium using a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or a secondary internal hard disk drive.
5. Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium.
• To create a rescue medium on the Windows Vista operating system or the Windows XP operating system,
do the following:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start ➙ All Programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Create Recovery
Media. The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens.
2. In the Rescue Media area, select the type of the rescue medium you want to create. You can create
a rescue medium using a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or a secondary internal hard disk drive.
3. Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium.
Chapter 5. Recovery overview
115
Using a rescue medium
This section provides instructions on how to use the rescue medium you have created.
• If you have created a rescue medium using a disc, use the following instructions to use the rescue medium:
1. Turn off your computer.
2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Startup Device
Menu opens, release the F12 key.
3. On the Startup Device Menu, select the desired optical drive as the first boot device. Then, insert
the rescue disc into the optical drive and press Enter. The rescue medium starts.
• If you have created a rescue medium using a USB hard disk drive, use the following instructions to
use the rescue medium:
1. Attach the USB hard disk drive to one of the USB connectors on your computer.
2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Startup Device
Menu opens, release the F12 key.
3. On the Startup Device Menu, select the USB hard disk drive as the first boot device and press Enter.
The rescue medium starts.
• If you have created a rescue medium using the secondary internal hard disk drive, set the secondary
internal hard disk drive as the first boot device in the startup device sequence to start the rescue medium.
See “Startup menu” on page 204.
Note: If you want to install a secondary hard disk drive, see “Inserting the hard disk drive adapter into
the bay” on page 176.
When the rescue medium starts, the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. The help information for
each feature is available from the Rescue and Recovery workspace. Follow the instructions to complete
the recovery process.
Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers
Your computer has provisions that enable you to reinstall selected factory-installed applications and device
drivers.
Reinstalling preinstalled applications
To reinstall selected application programs, do the following:
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Use Windows Explorer or Computer (in Windows XP, My Computer) to display the directory structure of
your hard disk.
3. Open the C:\SWTOOLS folder.
4. Open the APPS folder. In it are several subfolders named for the various preinstalled applications.
5. Open the subfolder for the application you are reinstalling.
6. Double-click Setup, and then follow the on-screen steps to reinstall the program.
Reinstalling preinstalled device drivers
Attention: When you reinstall device drivers, you are changing the current configuration of your computer.
Reinstall device drivers only when it is necessary to correct a problem with your computer.
To reinstall a device driver for a factory-installed device, do the following:
1. Turn on your computer.
116
User Guide
2. Use Windows Explorer or Computer (in Windows XP, My Computer) to display the directory structure of
your hard disk drive.
3. Open the C:\SWTOOLS folder.
4. Open the DRIVERS folder. Within the DRIVERS folder are several subfolders named for the various
devices installed in your computer (for example, AUDIO and VIDEO).
5. Open the subfolder for the device.
6. Reinstall the device driver by one of the following methods:
• In the subfolder for the device, look for a text file (a file with the extension .txt). The text file contains
information on how to reinstall that device driver.
-OR• If the subfolder for the device contains a file of setup information (a file with the extension .inf), you
can use the Add New Hardware program (in the Windows Control Panel) to reinstall the device driver.
Not all device drivers can be reinstalled by use of this program. In the Add New Hardware program,
when prompted for the device driver you want to install, click Have Disk and Browse. Then select
the device driver file from the device subfolder.
-OR• In the subfolder for the device, look for the file for the application (a file with the extension .exe).
Double-click the file, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Attention: If you need updated device drivers, do not download them from the Windows Update Web site.
Obtain them from Lenovo. For more information, see “Making sure device drivers are current” on page 222.
Solving recovery problems
If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment, do one
of the following:
• Use a rescue medium to start the Rescue and Recovery workspace. See “Using a rescue medium” on
page 116.
• Use recovery media if all other methods of recovery have failed and you need to restore the hard disk
drive to the factory default settings. See “Using recovery media” on page 112.
Note: If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment
from a rescue medium or recovery media, you might not have the rescue device (an internal hard disk
drive, a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or other external devices) set as the first boot device in the startup
device sequence. You must first make sure that your rescue device is set as the first boot device in the
startup device sequence in the ThinkPad Setup. See “Startup menu” on page 204 for detailed information
about temporarily or permanently changing the startup device sequence. For more information about the
ThinkPad Setup, see “ThinkPad Setup” on page 201.
It is important to create a rescue medium and a set of recovery media as early as possible and store them
in a safe place for future use.
Chapter 5. Recovery overview
117
118
User Guide
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
You can increase the capacity of the memory or the hard disk drive by replacing the original, built-in device
with an optional one. Or, if you need to, you can replace the PCI Express Mini Card or the Modem Daughter
Card by following the procedures in this section.
•
“Static electricity prevention” on page 119
•
“Replacing the battery” on page 119
•
“Replacing the backup battery” on page 124
•
“Replacing the hard disk drive” on page 126
•
“Replacing the keyboard” on page 130
•
“Replacing memory” on page 135
•
“Replacing the mSATA solid state drive” on page 148
•
“Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN/WiMAX connection” on page 151
•
“Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection” on page 160
•
“Replacing the SIM card” on page 164
•
“Replacing the solid state drive” on page 166
•
“Replacing the Ultrabay device” on page 170
Static electricity prevention
Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options.
Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can cause damage to the part. When you unpack an option
or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you
to install it.
When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions
to avoid static-electricity damage:
• Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.
• Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the
edges. Never touch exposed circuitry.
• Prevent others from touching components.
• When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the
part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two
seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body.
• When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part
without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth,
level surface and place the part on it.
• Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface.
Replacing the battery
Before you start, print these instructions.
This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The system will
continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
119
Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and
provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use.
To replace the battery with a new one, read the following prerequisites.
Prerequisites for the procedure
DANGER
If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery
pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:
• Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Do not expose it to excessive heat.
• Do not expose it to water or rain.
• Do not short-circuit it.
• Do not drop, crush, puncture, or subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can
cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to “vent” from the battery
pack or coin cell.
To replace the battery, follow the procedures below.
Replacing the battery installed in the battery space of your computer
1. Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables
from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Unlock the battery latch by sliding it to the unlock position (1). Holding the latch in the unlocked
position, remove the battery (2).
120
User Guide
4. Slide the battery into the computer.
5. Slide the battery latch to the locked position.
6. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer.
Using the Extended Life Battery
For longer battery life an Extended Life Battery is available as an option. You can attach it to the docking
connector of your computer as follows.
1. Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables
from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
121
3. Align the Extended Life Battery with the bottom side of the computer as shown in the illustration below
and firmly attach the battery.
4. Slide the battery latch to the locked position.
5. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer.
To remove the Extended Life Battery, do the following:
1. Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables
from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
122
User Guide
3. Unlock the battery latch.
4. Press the latch as shown in the illustration below and detach the battery.
5. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
123
Replacing the backup battery
Before you start, print these instructions.
To replace the backup battery under the keyboard with a new one, read the following prerequisites.
Prerequisites for the procedure
DANGER
If the backup battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The backup battery
contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:
• Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Do not expose it to excessive heat.
• Do not expose it to water or rain.
• Do not short-circuit it.
• Do not drop, crush, puncture, or subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can
cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to “vent” from the battery
pack or coin cell.
To replace the backup battery under the keyboard, do the following.
Removing the backup battery under the keyboard
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
5. Detach the connector (1). Then remove the backup battery (2).
124
User Guide
Installing the backup battery under the keyboard
1. Install the backup battery (1). Then attach the connector(2).
2. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
3. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
125
Replacing the hard disk drive
Before you start, print these instructions.
You can replace the hard disk drive with a new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a
marketing representative. To replace the hard disk drive, read the following prerequisites.
Note: Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and slot of the
hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping.
Prerequisites for the procedure
When replacing the drive, be sure to follow the precautions.
Attention: When you are handling a hard disk drive:
• Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that
absorbs any physical shocks.
• Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive.
• Do not touch the connector.
The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data.
Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on it, and then turn the
computer off.
Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep (standby) mode, or in hibernation mode.
To replace the hard disk drive, do as follows:
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Loosen the screw that secures the cover of the slot (1), and then remove the cover itself (2).
126
User Guide
5. Remove the hard disk drive by pulling out the tab.
6. Detach the side rubber rails from the hard disk drive.
7. Attach the side rubber rails to a new hard disk drive.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
127
8. Insert the hard disk drive into the slot.
9. Slide the hard disk drive firmly into place.
10. Reinstall the cover of the slot (1), and tighten the screw (2).
11. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
128
User Guide
12. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
129
Replacing the keyboard
Before you start, print these instructions.
You can use the following procedures to replace the keyboard with a new one, available as an option.
Prerequisites for the procedure
DANGER
During electrical storms, do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet
on the wall.
DANGER
Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock
hazard, disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot.
To replace the keyboard, do as follows.
Removing the keyboard
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Loosen the two screws on the memory slot cover (1), then remove the cover (2).
130
User Guide
5. Remove two screws that secure the keyboard.
6. Turn the computer over and open the display.
7. Push hard in the direction shown by the arrows (1) in the drawing to unlatch the front side of the
keyboard. The keyboard will open up slightly (2).
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
131
8. Carefully lift the keyboard until you can see how it's connected. Hold the keyboard above the computer,
and then detach the connector (1). Now the keyboard has been removed (2).
Installing the keyboard
1. Attach the connector.
132
User Guide
2. Insert the keyboard. Make sure that the rear edges of the keyboard are under the frame as shown by
the arrows.
3. Slide the keyboard as shown by the arrows.
4. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. Reinstall the two screws.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
133
5. Put the memory slot cover back in place (1), close the cover (2), and then tighten the two screws (3).
6. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
7. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
134
User Guide
Replacing memory
Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs run faster. You can increase the amount
of memory in your computer by installing a double data rate three synchronous dynamic random access
memory unbuffered small outline dual inline memory module (SDRAM), available as an option, in the memory
slot of the computer. SO-DIMMs with different capacities are available.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do
not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs. For details, refer to the instructions in “Increasing or
replacing memory (W520)” on page 139.
Prerequisites for the procedure
When replacing the memory, be sure to follow the precautions.
Note: The operating speed of the memory module depends on the system configuration of your computer
and its combination with the memory module installed on your computer. In some conditions, the memory in
your computer may not be able to operate at the maximum speed.
Attention: Before you start installing a module, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action
reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the SO-DIMM.
Replacing memory (T520 and T520i)
Before you start, print these instructions.
Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs run faster. You can increase the amount
of memory in your computer by installing a PC3-8500 or PC3-10600 double data rate 3 synchronous
dynamic random access memory (DRAM) unbuffered small outline dual inline memory module, available
as an option, in the memory slots located on the underside of your computer and under the keyboard.
SO-DIMMs with different capacities are available.
Notes:
• Use either a PC3-8500 or a PC3-10600 DDR3 synchronous DRAM unbuffered SO-DIMM in your
computer. If you install an SO-DIMM that is not supported by your computer, the computer may beep,
and the system may not start or may not work properly. You can purchase the appropriate memory option
from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative.
Your computer has two memory slots: one under the keyboard and another on the underside of the
computer. To replace the SO-DIMM, follow the procedure below.
Replacing memory in the slot on the underside of the computer
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
135
4. Loosen the two screws on the memory slot cover (1), and then remove the cover (2).
If an SO-DIMM is already in the memory slot, remove it to make room for the new one by pressing out
on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time (1). Be sure to save it for future use (2).
5. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
136
User Guide
6. With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees (1); then press it in firmly (2).
7. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward until it snaps into place.
8. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
9. Put the memory slot cover back in place (1), close the cover (2), and tighten the two screws (3).
10. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
11. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Replacing memory in the slot under the keyboard
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
137
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
5. If an SO-DIMM is already in the memory slot, remove it to make room for the new one by pressing out
on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save it for future use.
6. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
7. With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
(1) into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees; then press it in firmly (2).
Note: If you install a memory module in only one of the two memory slots, install it in the slot under the
keyboard.
8. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward until it snaps into place.
9. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
138
User Guide
10. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
11. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
12. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
To make sure that the SO-DIMM is installed correctly, do as follows:
1. Turn the computer on.
2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens. The “Installed memory” item
shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer.
Increasing or replacing memory (W520)
Before you start, print these instructions.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards (1) and (2) are preinstalled
in the topside and underside of your computer and do not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
On the top figure, the Dummy DIMM card is preinstalled in the lower slot under the keyboard.
Note: Your computer may look slightly different from what this illustration shows.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
139
Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs run faster. You can increase the amount of
memory in your computer by installing a PC3-8500 or PC3-10600 double data rate 3 synchronous dynamic
random access memory (DRAM) unbuffered small outline dual inline memory module (SO-DIMM), available
as an option, in the memory slots located on the underside of your computer and under the keyboard.
SO-DIMMs with different capacities are available.
Notes:
• If your computer is a dual-core processor model, do not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
• Use either a PC3-8500 or a PC3-10600 DDR3 synchronous DRAM unbuffered SO-DIMM supported by
your computer. If you install an SO-DIMM that is not supported by your computer, the computer may
beep, and the system may not start or may not work properly. You can purchase the appropriate memory
option from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative.
Increasing memory
Your computer has four memory slots: two slots under the keyboard and two on the underside of the
computer. To add an SO-DIMM, first check the slots on the underside of your computer.
Notes:
• If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do not
replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
• When adding memory, be sure to follow the instructions in this section. If you do not, the newly added
SO-DIMM may not be recognized and the total amount of memory will not increase.
Adding memory in the slot on the underside of the computer
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do not
replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Loosen the two screws on the memory slot cover (1), and then remove the cover (2).
If one or both slots are empty, proceed to step 5.
If all slots are taken, check the slot under the keyboard. Go to “Adding memory to the slot under
the keyboard” on page 142.
140
User Guide
5. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees (1); then press it in firmly. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward
(2) until it snaps into place.
Note: If both slots are empty: be sure to install the memory module in the slot on which “SLOT-0”
is printed.
Note: Your computer may look slightly different from what this illustration shows.
6. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
141
7. Put the memory slot cover back in place (1), close the cover (2), and tighten the two screws (3).
8. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
9. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Adding memory to the slot under the keyboard
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do not
replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
There are two slots under the keyboard of your computer, one above the other.
If the lower memory slot is empty, proceed to step 5.
If both slots are taken, refer to the ThinkPad Web site http://www.lenovo.com/ for more information.
5. For access to the lower slot, you must remove the SO-DIMM already installed in the upper slot. Be
sure to keep it. To remove the SO-DIMM, press out on the latches on both edges of the socket at
the same time (1), and remove the module (2).
142
User Guide
6. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
(1) into the lower socket at an angle of about 20 degrees; then press it in firmly. Pivot the SO-DIMM
downward (2) until it snaps into place.
7. Retrieve the SO-DIMM that was originally installed in the upper socket. With the notched end of the
SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert it (1) into the upper socket at an angle of
about 20 degrees; then press it in firmly. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward (2) until it snaps into place.
8. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
9. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
10. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
11. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
143
Replacing memory
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled and do not
replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs.
Replacing memory in the slot on the underside of the computer
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Loosen the two screws on the memory slot cover (1); then remove the cover (2).
5. Remove the SO-DIMM by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be
sure to save it for future use.
144
User Guide
6. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees (1); then press it in firmly. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward
(2) until it snaps into place.
Note: Be sure to install the new memory module in the slot where the old one was originally installed.
7. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
8. Put the memory slot cover back in place (1), close the cover (2), and tighten the two screws (3).
9. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
10. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
145
Replacing memory in the slot under the keyboard
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
5. Remove the SO-DIMM already installed in the slot by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the
socket at the same time. Be sure to save it for future use.
Note: If an SO-DIMM is installed in the upper slot, and you need to replace the SO-DIMM in the lower
slot, remove the SO-DIMM from the upper slot first. Be sure to reinstall it in the upper slot after you
replace the SO-DIMM in the lower slot.
6. Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO-DIMM you are installing.
Attention: To avoid damaging the SO-DIMM, do not touch its contact edge.
146
User Guide
7. With the notched end of the SO-DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket, insert the SO-DIMM
(1) into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees; then press it in firmly. Pivot the SO-DIMM downward
(2) until it snaps into place.
Note: If you install a memory module in only one of the two memory slots, be sure to install it in the
upper slot.
8. Make sure that the SO-DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
9. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
10. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
11. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Checking the total amount of memory installed in your computer
To make sure that the SO-DIMM is installed correctly, do as follows:
1. Turn the computer on.
2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup opens. The “Installed memory” item
shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer.
3. If the “Installed memory” item shows a different amount of memory from what you installed, check
whether you have correctly followed the instructions in this section.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
147
Installing and replacing the mSATA solid state drive
Before you start, print these instructions.
Some ThinkPad models have an mSATA solid state drive. You can replace the mSATA solid state drive with a
new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative. To replace the
mSATA solid state drive, read the following prerequisites.
Notes:
• You can also replace the mSATA solid state drive with a Wireless PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless WAN.
• Replace the mSATA solid state drive only if you need to have it repaired.
Prerequisites for the procedure
When replacing the mSATA solid state drive, be sure to follow the precautions.
Attention: When you are handling an mSATA solid state drive:
• Do not drop the mSATA solid state drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the mSATA solid state drive
on a material, such as soft cloth that absorbs any physical shocks.
• Do not apply pressure to the cover of the mSATA solid state drive.
The mSATA solid state drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of
data.
Before removing the mSATA solid state drive, make a backup copy of all the information on it, and then
turn the computer off.
Never remove the mSATA solid state drive while the system is operating, in sleep (standby) mode, or in
hibernation mode.
If an mSATA solid state drive is available in your computer, to replace the mSATA solid state drive, do
as follows.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
148
User Guide
5. Remove the screw (1). The card pops up (2).
6. Remove the card.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
149
7. Align the contact edge of a new mSATA solid state drive with the corresponding socket.
Notes:
• You can also replace the mSATA solid state drive with a Wireless PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless
WAN.
• To install a new PCI Express Mini Card, refer to “Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card
for wireless WAN connection” on page 160.
8. Pivot the card downward (1) until you can snap it into place. Secure the card with the screw (2).
9. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
10. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
11. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
150
User Guide
Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless
LAN/WiMAX connection
Before you start, print these instructions.
Your computer has a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless LAN/WiMAX. To replace the PCI
Express Mini Card with a new one, read the following prerequisites.
Prerequisites for the procedure
DANGER
During electrical storms, do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet
on the wall.
DANGER
Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock
hazard, disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot.
Attention: Before you start installing a PCI Express Mini Card, touch a metal table or a grounded metal
object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the card.
Your computer has a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless LAN/WiMAX. To replace the
PCI Express Mini Card with a new one, follow the procedure below.
Replacing a PCI Express Mini Card with two connectors
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
151
5. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the
cables from the card. If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables by picking up the connectors
with your fingers and gently unplugging them.
6. Remove the two screws (1). The card pops up (2).
152
User Guide
7. Remove the card.
8. Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket contact of the
computer.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
153
Note: If the new PCI Express Mini Card has two connectors, as in the next drawing, put the white cable
in the cable protection tube.
9. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors (1), and
secure the card with the two screws (2).
154
User Guide
10. Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card. Be sure to attach the gray cable to the connector
marked “MAIN” or “M” on the card, and the black cable to the connector marked “AUX” or “A.”
Note: If the new PCI Express Mini Card has three connectors, be sure to attach the gray cable to the
connector marked “TR1” on the card, and the black cable to the connector marked “TR2”. If you attach
either cable to the center connector, the connection speed will be lower.
11. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
12. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
13. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Replacing a PCI Express Mini Card with three connectors
If your computer has a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) feature, a PCI Express Mini Card that has three
connectors comes with the computer. To replace the card for the MIMO feature, do as follows:
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
155
5. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the
cables from the card. If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables by picking up the connectors
with your fingers and gently unplugging them.
6. Remove the two screws (1). The card pops up (2).
156
User Guide
7. Remove the card.
8. Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket contact of the
computer.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
157
Note: If the new PCI Express Mini Card has two connectors, as in the next drawing, put the white cable
in the cable protection tube.
9. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors (1), and
secure the card with the two screws (2).
158
User Guide
10. Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card. Be sure to attach the gray cable to the connector
marked “TR1” on the card, the white cable to the connector marked “RO” or “TR3” (center), and the
black cable to the connector marked “TR2”.
11. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
12. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
13. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
159
Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN
connection
Before you start, print these instructions.
Some ThinkPad models have a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless WAN. To replace the
PCI Express Mini Card with a new one, read the following prerequisites.
Prerequisites for the procedure
DANGER
During electrical storms, do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet
on the wall.
DANGER
Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock
hazard, disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot.
Attention: Before you start installing a PCI Express Mini Card, touch a metal table or a grounded metal
object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the card.
If a Wireless WAN is available in your computer, to replace the PCI Express Mini Card, do as follows.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for
a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Remove the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
5. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the
cables from the card. If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables by picking up the connectors
with your fingers and gently unplugging them.
Note: Depending on the system configuration of your computer, the card may have only one connector.
160
User Guide
6. Remove the two screws (1). The card pops up (2).
7. Remove the card.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
161
8. Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket.
Notes:
• You can also replace the PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless WAN with an mSATA solid state drive.
• To install a new mSATA solid state drive, refer to “Installing and replacing the mSATA solid state
drive” on page 148.
9. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of each connector (1). Secure
the card with the two screws (2).
Note: Depending on the system configuration of your computer, the card may have only one connector.
162
User Guide
10. Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card.
11. Reinstall the keyboard. See “Replacing the keyboard” on page 130.
12. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
13. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
163
Replacing the SIM card
Before you start, print these instructions.
Your computer may require a SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) card to establish a wireless WAN (Wide
Area Network) connections. Depending on the country of delivery, the SIM card may be already installed in
your computer or will be part of the shipping contents that came with your computer.
If you find the SIM cards included in the shipping contents, a dummy card is installed in the SIM card
slot. Then proceed to the following instructions.
If you find the dummy card in the shipping contents, the SIM card is already installed in the SIM card
slot, and no further installation is needed.
Note: The SIM card is identified by the IC chip mounted on one side of the card.
To replace the SIM card, do as follows.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn it over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Find the SIM card slot inside the open battery compartment. Gently push the card (1). The card comes
partway out of the slot. Now you can remove it (2).
164
User Guide
5. Insert the SIM card firmly into the slot.
Note: Make sure that you insert the SIM card all the way into the slot.
6. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
7. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
165
Replacing the solid state drive
Before you start, print these instructions.
You can replace the solid state drive with a new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a
marketing representative. To replace the solid state drive, read the following prerequisites.
Note: Replace the solid state drive only if you need to have it repaired. The connectors and slot of the solid
state drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping.
Prerequisites for the procedure
When replacing the drive, be sure to follow the precautions.
Attention: When you are handling a solid state drive:
• Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth that
absorbs any physical shocks.
• Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive.
• Do not touch the connector.
The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data.
Before removing the solid state drive, make a backup copy of all the information on it, and then turn the
computer off.
Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep (standby) mode, or in hibernation mode.
To replace the solid state drive, do as follows.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
3. Remove the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
4. Loosen the screw that secures the cover of the slot (1), and then remove the cover itself (2).
166
User Guide
5. Remove the solid state drive by pulling out the tab.
6. Detach the side spacer rails from the solid state drive.
7. Attach the side spacer rails to a new solid state drive.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
167
8. Insert the solid state drive into the slot.
9. Slide the solid state drive firmly into place.
10. Reinstall the cover of the slot (1), and tighten the screw (2).
11. Reinstall the battery. See “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
168
User Guide
12. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on.
Chapter 6. Replacing devices
169
Replacing the Ultrabay device
Before you start, print these instructions.
To replace the Ultrabay device, do the following.
1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
2. Unlock the bay lock latch (1) by sliding it to the top. While holding the bay lock latch in the unlocked
position, slide the bay eject latch (2) to the left, then pull out the Ultrabay device (3).
3. Insert the replaceable device into the bay; then press the device firmly into the connector.
170
User Guide
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
This section provides information on installing devices and taking advantage of your computer's
high-technology features.
•
“Finding ThinkPad options” on page 171
•
“Using the serial Ultrabay enhanced” on page 171
•
“ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, and
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)” on page 177
Finding ThinkPad options
If you want to expand the capabilities of your computer, Lenovo has a number of hardware accessories and
upgrades to meet your needs. Options include memory, storage, modems, networking adapters, docking
stations and port replicators, batteries, power adapters, printers, scanners, keyboards, mice, and more.
You can shop at Lenovo 24 hours a day, 7 days a week directly over the World Wide Web. All you need is an
Internet connection and a credit card.
To shop at Lenovo, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html
Using the serial Ultrabay enhanced
Use serial Ultrabay enhanced for installing devices, such as a MultiBurner drive, a CD-RW/DVD drive, a hard
disk drive. If a serial Ultrabay enhanced is not installed in your computer, or if you want to purchase a serial
Ultrabay enhanced device, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/accessories
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
Performing a hot swap
To do a hot swap is to connect, remove, or reconnect a device while the computer is operating.
To hot-swap the Ultrabay device, do as follows:
Note: Hot-swap is not supported when your computer is docked or when the Extended Life Battery
is installed.
1. Click the Show hidden icons in the task bar, then click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media
icon (in Windows Vista and Windows XP, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the task bar), and
then stop the device.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
171
2. Unlock the bay lock latch (1) by sliding it to the top. While holding the bay lock latch in the unlocked
position, slide the bay eject latch (2) to the left, then pull out the Ultrabay device (3).
3. Insert the replaceable device into the bay; then press the device firmly into the connector.
Note: If a hard disk password is set on a hard disk drive, you cannot hot-swap the drive. First remove the
hard disk password, and then do the hot swap. Refer to “Hard disk passwords” on page 99.
Performing a warm swap
To do a warm swap is to connect, remove, or reconnect a device while the computer is in sleep (standby)
mode.
If the computer is in sleep (standby) mode, you can do a warm swap as follows:
172
User Guide
1. Unlock the bay lock latch (1) by sliding it to the top. While holding the bay lock latch in the unlocked
position, slide the bay eject latch (2) to the left, then pull out the Ultrabay device (3).
Note: The computer returns from sleep (standby) mode and the pop-up window appears; then the
computer automatically goes into sleep (standby) mode again. The bay status indicator (1) turns off.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
173
2. Insert the replaceable device into the bay; then press the device firmly into the connector.
3. Press the Fn key to return from sleep (standby) mode.
Inserting the hard disk drive into the adapter
The ThinkPad Serial Hard Drive Bay Adapter III (hard disk drive adapter), which is available as an option,
enables you to upgrade the capacity of your computer by installing a secondary hard disk drive.
Note: The ThinkPad Serial Hard Drive Bay Adapter III supports only 2.5 inch (7 mm height) hard disk drive.
To install the hard disk drive in your computer, you first insert the hard disk drive into the hard disk drive
adapter, and then insert the hard disk drive adapter into the serial Ultrabay enhanced of your computer.
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanceddevice
in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
Attention: Replace a hard disk drive only if you are upgrading it or having it repaired. Frequent replacement
of the hard disk drive might damage the drive and bay.
1. Remove the hard disk drive from your computer. To remove the drive, refer to the instructions given in
“Upgrading the hard disk drive” on page 126.
2. Open the hard disk drive stopper.
174
User Guide
3. Insert the hard disk drive with the label facing upward as shown:
Note: If your hard disk drive has a strap, be sure not to leave it under the drive.
4. Connect the hard disk drive to its connector.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
175
5. Close the hard disk drive stopper.
Notes:
• Make sure that the hard disk drive is inserted tightly into the hard disk drive adapter.
• Do not push the cover too hard; you could damage the hard disk drive or the hard disk drive adapter.
• You cannot insert a hard disk drive for other ThinkPad series computers into this ThinkPad Serial Hard
Drive Bay Adapter III. If you want to use the files on the hard disk drive of another ThinkPad notebook,
copy the files to a removable storage device.
Inserting the hard disk drive adapter into the bay
Notes:
• Use the ThinkPad Serial Hard Drive Bay Adapter III designed specifically for use with your computer.
• The ThinkPad Serial Hard Drive Bay Adapter III supports only 2.5 inch (7 mm height) hard disk drive.
After you insert a hard disk drive into a hard disk drive adapter, you can insert the adapter into the serial
Ultrabay enhanced of your computer, provided that the computer is in one of the following conditions:
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
• The computer is turned off. For how to insert the adapter, refer to “Replacing the device” on page 170.
• The computer is in sleep (standby) mode. You can insert the adapter while the computer is in sleep
(standby) mode. For how to insert the adapter, refer to “Performing a warm swap” on page 172.
• The computer is operating. You can insert the adapter while the computer is operating. For how to insert
the adapter, refer to “Performing a hot swap” on page 171.
Notes: If you insert the hard disk drive adapter into the bay while the computer is in sleep (standby) mode
or operating, and the hard disk drive is protected by a password, you cannot get access to the drive right
after inserting the adapter into the bay. To get access to it, do the following:
1. Press Fn+F12 to put your computer in Hibernate mode. You may have to wait for a while till the
computer enters Hibernate mode.
2. Press power switch to return to normal operation. The hard disk password icon appears at the
upper left of the screen.
3. Type the password. Now you can get access to the hard disk drive.
176
User Guide
When you insert the hard disk drive adapter into the bay, make sure that you insert it firmly. If you want to
secure your hard disk drive adapter, install a hex-head screw (included in the shipping contents) into the
screw hole.
ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3,
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3
(170 W)
After you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3,
the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), you can use its
connectors in place of the computer's.
When the computer is attached to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3,
the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), never pick up the
assembly by taking hold of the computer alone. Always hold the whole assembly.
For more details about the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), refer to the following:
•
“Front view” on page 178
•
“Rear view” on page 181
•
“Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)” on page 185
•
“Detaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)” on page 188
•
“Security feature” on page 190
•
“Using the system lock key” on page 192
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
177
Front view
ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3
1
The power switch turns the computer on and off.
2
The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 when pressed.
3 The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach
the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3.
4
The docking connector is where you attach your computer.
178
User Guide
ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3
1
The power switch turns the computer on and off.
2 The key lock indicator lights when the system lock key is in the locked position. When the system lock
key is in the locked position, the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 is locked; you cannot
attach or remove your computer.
3
The docking indicator lights when your computer is docked.
4
The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 when pressed.
5 The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3.
6
The docking connector is where you attach your computer.
7
The system lock key is for locking the eject button.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
179
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)
1
The power switch turns the computer on and off.
2 The key lock indicator lights when the system lock key is in the locked position. When the system lock
key is in the locked position, the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Mini Dock
Plus Series 3 (170 W) is locked; you cannot attach or remove your computer.
3
The docking indicator lights when your computer is docked.
4 The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) when pressed.
5 The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W).
6
The docking connector is where you attach your computer.
7
The system lock key is for locking the eject button.
8
The microphone jack, a jack 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) in diameter, is for connecting an external microphone.
9
The headphone jack, a jack 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) in diameter, is for connecting an external stereo headphone.
180
User Guide
Rear view
ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3
1
The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter.
2 The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 to an Ethernet LAN.
The indicator on the connector is the same as that on the computer.
Notes:
• You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connector.
• You can use this connector for a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Ethernet.
If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector, use the
Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, not the one on the computer.
3
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 devices.
4
The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor.
Note: If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 and use an external monitor
connector, use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, not the one on the
computer.
5 When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole, the eject button is locked so that the
computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
181
ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3
1
The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter.
2
The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device.
3
The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single-Link DVI.
Note: The DVI connector provides a digital interface only. This connector can be used with a computer that
supports DVI via docking only.
4
The headphone jack, a jack 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) in diameter, is for connecting an external stereo headphone.
5
The microphone jack, a jack 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) in diameter, is for connecting an external microphone.
6 The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 to an Ethernet LAN. The
indicator on the connector is the same as that on the computer.
Notes:
• You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connector.
• You can use this connector for a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Ethernet.
If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector, use the
Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, not the one on the computer.
7
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 devices.
8
The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor.
Note: If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and use an external monitor connector,
use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, not the one on the computer.
9 When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole, the eject button is locked so that the
computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3.
182
User Guide
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)
1
The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device.
2
The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single-Link DVI.
Note: The DVI connector provides a digital interface only. This connector can be used with a computer that
supports DVI via docking only.
3
The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device.
4
The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single-Link DVI.
Note: The DVI connector provides a digital interface only. This connector can be used with a computer that
supports DVI via docking only.
5 The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) to an Ethernet LAN. The indicator on the connector is the same as that on the
computer.
Notes:
• You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connector.
• You can use this connector for a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Ethernet.
If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series
3 (170 W) and use an Ethernet connector, use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series
3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), not the one on the computer.
6
The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 devices.
7
The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter.
Note: For ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), use the ac power adapter shipped with your computer.
8
The eSATA is for connecting an eSATA device.
9
The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
183
Note: If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3 (170 W) and use an external monitor connector, use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), not the one on the computer.
10 When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole, the eject button is locked so that the
computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3 (170 W).
184
User Guide
Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock
Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3 (170 W)
To attach your computer to a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, a ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), do the following:
The following drawings are for the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or
the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W). The procedure is the same for the ThinkPad Port Replicator
Series 3.
Notes:
• Before you attach the computer to a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series
3, a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), disconnect an
ac power adapter from the computer.
• If your computer is operating, make sure that it has finished any operations involving devices that are
connected to a USB connector and a USB/eSATA connector. Also make sure that any connection to
an Ethernet port has ended.
• Before you attach your computer to a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series
3, or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), make sure that the system lock key is in place and
in the unlocked (horizontal) position.
• For ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), use the 170 W ac power adapter shipped with your
computer.
1. To attach your computer, make sure that the system lock key is in place and in the unlocked (horizontal)
position for the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W). Make sure that the mechanical lock is detached for the ThinkPad
Port Replicator Series 3.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
185
2. Press the button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) (1). Pull the sliding adjuster in the direction shown by the
arrow (2).
3. Put your computer on the platform of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), making sure that the top-left corner of the
computer is aligned to the guide plate on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock
Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W).
4. Insert your computer into the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or
the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), along the surface, until you hear a click. The computer
is now attached to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W).
Note: If the docking indicator is not lighted after you attach the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), your computer
is not properly connected to the dock. Check the ac power adapter of the dock, or disconnect and
re-attach the ac power adapter. Then attach your computer to the dock.
Notes:
186
User Guide
• If you attach the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) to your computer, but do not connect
the ac power adapter of that attachment to the power jack, your computer goes into battery mode.
• If your computer and the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) are connected to
separate ac power adapters, your computer goes into battery mode first, and then shifts into ac mode.
• If in either of the two preceding situations the battery of your computer is detached, or has no battery
charge, your computer shuts down.
Connecting an external display to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and the ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)
Group 1 (top figure) and Group 2 (lower figure) are independent of each other. Each has a DisplayPort and a
digital visual interface. If you connect a display to a DisplayPort and a DVI that are in the same group, the
DisplayPort is inactive.
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
187
Detaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock
Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock
Plus Series 3 (170 W)
To detach your computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3,
or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), do the following:
1. Make sure that:
• The devices connected to USB connectors are not in use.
• The connection to an Ethernet port has been ended.
• The devices connected to an eSATA port are not in use (ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)).
2. Make sure that the system lock key of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) is in place and in the unlocked (horizontal)
position.
3. Press the eject button (1) until the computer moves up; then, grasp both sides, and remove the
computer (2).
To detach your computer from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, do the following:
188
User Guide
Notes:
• If your computer is operating, make sure that it has finished operations involving devices that are
connected to the USB connector. Also make sure that any Ethernet connection is stopped.
• Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged.
1. Make sure that all ejectable devices connected to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 are stopped.
2. Press the eject button (1) until the computer moves up; then, grasp both sides, and remove the
computer (2).
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
189
Security feature
The ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) has a security keyhole for a mechanical lock.
By attaching a mechanical lock with cable there, you can secure the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3,
the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus
Series 3 (170 W) to a heavy object, such as a desk.
If you use the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, and attach a mechanical lock, the eject button is also
locked, so that the computer cannot be detached from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3.
If you use the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini
Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W), and attach a mechanical lock, the eject button is not locked. To lock the
eject button, use the system lock key.
Lenovo does not offer a mechanical lock. You will need to purchase one elsewhere. You are responsible
for evaluating, selecting, and implementing any locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no
comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of any locking device or
security features.
Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3
(170 W) as follows:
190
User Guide
Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 as follows:
Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 as follows:
Chapter 7. Enhancing your computer
191
Using the system lock key
The system lock key has two positions, unlocked and locked.
When the key is in the locked position, the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, the ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) is locked, and you cannot remove
your computer. The key lock indicator lights when the eject button is locked.
192
User Guide
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
While it is important to protect files, data, and settings that are on the hard disk or on the solid state drive,
you may also need to install a new operating system, install new device drivers, update your UEFI BIOS, or
recover preinstalled software. This information will help you handle your computer with proper care and
keep it in top working shape.
•
“Installing a new operating system” on page 193
•
“Installing device drivers” on page 199
•
“ThinkPad Setup” on page 201
•
“Using system management” on page 217
Installing a new operating system
If you install a new operating system in your computer, you need to install the Supplement files and ThinkPad
device drivers for it at the same time. The necessary files are located in the following directories of your solid
state drive or hard disk drive:
• The Supplement files for the operating system supported are in the C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES directory.
• The device drivers for the operating system supported are in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory.
• The preloaded software applications are in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory.
Notes:
• The process of installing the new operating system deletes all the data on your hard disk, including
backups or images that were stored in a hidden folder by use of the Rescue and Recovery program.
• If you cannot find the Supplement files, the device drivers, and application software you need on your
hard disk drive, or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Before you begin
Before you install the operating system, do the following:
• Copy all the subdirectories and files in the C:\SWTOOLS directory to a removable storage device, to avoid
losing files during the installation.
• Print the sections you will be using. Go to the section for the operating system you are using:
–
“Windows 7” on page 194
–
“Windows Vista” on page 195
–
“Windows XP” on page 196
Notes: If your computer is a Windows Vista SP2 or Windows 7 model,
– 32-bit versions of Windows do not support UEFI BIOS features. Only 64-bit versions of Windows can
take advantage of the features enabled by 64-bit UEFI BIOS.
– If you want to start Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) using 64-bit version of Microsoft Windows
Installation DVD, you should not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in ThinkPad Setup. The
UEFI/Legacy Boot setting must be the same as it was when the Windows OS image was installed. Or,
you will see an error.
For the country or region code required in the installation, use one of the following:
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
193
Country or region: Code
China: SC
Denmark: DK
Finland: FI
France: FR
Germany: GR
Italy: IT
Japan: JP
Netherlands: NL
Netherlands: NL
Norway: NO
Spain: SP
Sweden: SV
Taiwan and Hong Kong: TC
United States: US
Installing Windows 7
Before you start, print these instructions.
To install Windows 7 and its related software on your computer, do as follows:
1. Start ThinkPad Setup.
2. Select Startup menu.
3. Select UEFI/Legacy Boot.
4. Do one of the following:
• If you want to install the Windows 7 32–bit operating system, select Legacy Only or Both.
• If you want to install the Windows 7 64–bit operating system in Legacy mode, select Legacy Only.
• If you want to install the Windows 7 64–bit operating system in UEFI mode, select UEFI Only.
5. Press F10.
6. To install Windows 7, insert the DVD for Windows 7 into the DVD drive, and install Windows 7 from the
DVD. Then restart the computer, and follow the instructions on the screen.
7. Restore C:\SWTOOLS from the backup copy you made before starting the installation.
8. Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To do this, run infinst_autol.exe in
C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\INTELINF.
9. Install device drivers. They are provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive.
You will also need to install application software, which is provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory on
your hard disk drive. To do this, refer to the instructions in “Reinstalling preinstalled applications and
device drivers” on page 116.
Note: If you cannot find the Supplement files, device drivers, and application software you need on your
hard disk drive, or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Installing Registry Patches for Windows 7
Install the following Registry Patches:
• Registry patch enabling Wake Up on LAN from Standby for Energy Star
• Fix for Issue of HDD with HD Detection
To install these Registry Patches, go to:
http://support.lenovo.com
194
User Guide
Installing the Windows 7 Update Module Package
The Windows 7 Update Modules are in the following directory:
C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\.
The name of each subfolder is the number of a fix module. For information about each fix module, go to
the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/, type the number of the fix
module you need in the search field, and click Search.
Note: The Web site address might change without notice. If the homepage is not displayed, search for it
from the Microsoft top page.
To install a fix module, run the EXE file in a subfolder and follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: If you remove the hard disk drive from the computer with a single-core processor and install it on a
computer with a dual-core processor, you can get access to the hard disk drive. The opposite, however, is
not true: If you remove the hard disk drive from a computer with a dual-core processor and install it on a
computer with a single-core processor, you cannot get access to the hard disk drive.
Installing Windows Vista
Before you start, print these instructions.
Note: Your computer supports Windows Vista with the Service Pack 2. Before you install Windows Vista
Service Pack 2, make sure you install the Windows Vista Service Pack 1 first.
To install Windows Vista and its related software on your computer, do as follows:
1. Start ThinkPad Setup.
2. Select Startup menu.
3. Select UEFI/Legacy Boot.
4. Do one of the following:
• If you want to install the Windows Vista 32–bit operating system, select Legacy Only or Both.
• If you want to install the Windows Vista 64–bit operating system in Legacy mode, select Legacy Only.
• If you want to install the Windows Vista 64–bit operating system in UEFI mode, select UEFI Only.
5. Press F10.
6. Insert the DVD for Windows Vista integrated with Service Pack 2 into the DVD drive, and restart the
computer.
7. Install the Windows Vista Service Pack 2. You can install the Windows Vista Service Pack 2 using the
Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or
Microsoft Windows update Web site.
8. Restore C:\SWTOOLS from the backup copy you made before starting the installation.
9. Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To do this, run infinst_autol.exe in
C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\INTELINF.
10. Install device drivers. They are provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive.
You will also need to install application software, which is provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory on
your hard disk drive. To do this, refer to the instructions in “Reinstalling preinstalled applications and
device drivers” on page 116.
Note: If you cannot find the Supplement files, device drivers, and application software you need on your
hard disk drive, or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
195
Installing Registry Patches for Windows Vista
Install the following Registry Patches:
• Registry Patch enabling Device Initiated Power Management on SATA
• Registry Patch enabling USB S3 Power Management
• Registry patch to change IDLE IRP timing by Fingerprint reader
• Registry patch enabling Wake Up on LAN from Standby for Energy Star
• Registry patch to improve USB device detection on resume from sleep
• Fix for Issue of HDD with HD Detection
To install these Registry Patches, go to :
http://support.lenovo.com
Installing the Windows Vista Update Module Package
The Windows Vista Update Modules are in the following directory:
C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\.
The name of each subfolder is the number of a fix module. For information about each fix module, go to
the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/, type the number of the fix
module you need in the search field, and click Search.
Note: The Web site address might change without notice. If the homepage is not displayed, search for it
from the Microsoft top page.
To install a fix module, run the .exe file in a subfolder and follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: If you remove the hard disk drive from the computer with a single-core processor and install it on a
computer with a dual-core processor, you can get access to the hard disk drive. The opposite, however, is
not true: If you remove the hard disk drive from a computer with a dual-core processor and install it on a
computer with a single-core processor, you cannot get access to the hard disk drive.
Installing Windows XP
Before you start, print these instructions.
Note: Your computer supports Windows XP with Service Pack 3. Before you install the Windows XP Service
Pack 3, make sure you install the Windows XP Service Pack 2 first.
You must install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver before installing the operating system. To install it, you
may need to attach a diskette drive to your computer. If you have a diskette drive, follow the procedure below.
Note: If your computer has been set up to use RAID, you must follow the procedure that uses the diskette
drive to install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver.
Before installing the operating system, install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver as follows:
Note: Be sure to install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver before installing the operating system.
Otherwise your computer will not respond; it will only display a blue screen.
1. Attach a diskette drive to your computer.
2. Copy Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver from C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\IMSM to a diskette.
3. To make sure that SATA AHCI (or SATA RAID, if your computer is set up to use RAID) is enabled, start
ThinkPad Setup.
4. Select Config.
196
User Guide
5. Select Serial ATA (SATA).
6. Select AHCI (Select RAID if your computer is set up to use RAID).
7. Change the startup sequence of your computer. Select Startup menu.
8. Select UEFI/Legacy Boot.
9. Select Both or Legacy Only.
10. Press F10.
11. Insert the CD for Windows XP integrated with Service Pack 2 into the CD or DVD drive, and restart the
computer.
12. To install a third-party SCSI or RAID driver first, press F6.
13. When prompted, select S for Specify Additional Device.
14. When prompted, insert the diskette that you created in step 2, and press Enter.
15. Scroll the list of drivers. If the SATA setting of you computer is set to AHCI, select Intel® Mobile
Express Chipset SATA AHCI Controller. If it is set to RAID, select Intel® Mobile Express Chipset
SATA RAID Controller, and press Enter.
16. To continue the installation, press Enter again. Leave the diskette in the drive until the next reboot; the
software may need to be copied from the diskette again when the files are copied during setup.
17. Install Windows XP Service Pack 3. You can install the Windows XP Service Pack 3 using the Windows
XP Service Pack 3 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or Microsoft
Windows update Web site.
18. Restore C:\SWTOOLS from the backup copy you made before starting the installation.
19. Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7.. To do this, run infinst_autol.exe in
C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\INTELINF.
20. Apply the PCMCIA Power Policy Registry Patch. To do this, go to C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\PCMCIAPW\,
double-click install.bat. Then follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
21. Install device drivers. They are provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive.
You will also need to install application software, which is provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory on
your hard disk drive. To do this, refer to the instructions in Reinstalling preinstalled software applications
and device drivers.
Note: If you cannot find the Supplement files, device drivers, and application software you need on your
hard disk drive, or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them, refer to the
ThinkPad Web site at:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
If you do not have a diskette drive, you can install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver by the following
alternative procedure:
Notes:
• If your computer has been set up to use RAID, this procedure is not applicable for you.
• If you select AHCI for Serial ATA (SATA) in the ThinkPad Setup before installing Intel Rapid Storage
Technology Driver, your computer will not respond; it will only display a blue screen.
1. Start ThinkPad Setup.
2. Select Config.
3. Select Serial ATA (SATA).
4. Select Compatibility.
5. Change the startup sequence of your computer. Select Startup menu.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
197
6. Select UEFI/Legacy Boot.
7. Select Legacy Only or Both.
8. Press F10.
9. Insert the installation CD for Windows XP integrated with Service Pack 2 into the CD or DVD drive, and
restart the computer.
10. Install Windows XP Service Pack 3. You can install the Windows XP Service Pack 3 using the Windows
XP Service Pack 3 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or Microsoft
Windows update Web site.
11. Visit the Lenovo Web site at:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
12. Download Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver from the Web site.
13. Run Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver. To do this, go to C:\DRIVERS\WIN\IRST\PREPARE, and
double-click install.cmd.
14. Turn the computer off and then on again.
15. Start ThinkPad Setup.
16. Select Config.
17. Select Serial ATA (SATA).
18. Select AHCI.
19. Start Windows XP. The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard appears.
20. Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
21. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
22. Select Search for the best driver in these locations. Then select Include this location in the search:,
specify the path, C:\DRIVERS\WIN\IRST, and click Next. The Completing the Found New Hardware
Wizard appears.
23. Click Finish.
24. When the System Settings Change window appears, click Yes. The computer restarts.
25. Restore C:\SWTOOLS from the backup copy you made before starting the installation.
26. Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To do this, run infinst_autol.exe in
C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\INTELINF.
27. Apply the PCMCIA Power Policy Registry Patch. To do this, go to C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\PCMCIAPW\,
double-click install.bat, and then follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
28. Install device drivers. They are provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive.
You will also need to install application software, which is provided in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory on
your hard disk drive. To do this, refer to the instructions in “Reinstalling preinstalled applications and
device drivers” on page 116.
Note: If you cannot find the Supplement files, device drivers, and application software you need on your
hard disk drive, or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them, refer to the
ThinkPad Web site at:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Note: If you remove the hard disk drive from the computer with a single-core processor and install it on a
computer with a dual-core processor, you can get access to the hard disk drive. The opposite, however, is
not true: If you remove the hard disk drive from a computer with a dual-core processor and install it on a
computer with a single-core processor, you cannot get access to the hard disk drive.
198
User Guide
Installing device drivers
To install device drivers, go to:
http://support.lenovo.com
To install the driver for 4-in-1 media card reader, refer to:
“Installing the driver for 4-in-1 media card reader” on page 199.
To install the driver for USB 3.0, refer to:
“Installing the driver for USB 3.0” on page 199.
To install the ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7, refer to:
“Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7” on page 199.
Installing the driver for 4-in-1 media card reader
To use the 4-in-1 media card reader, you need to download and install the Ricoh Multi Card Reader Driver for
Windows 7/Vista and Windows XP x86/x64. To download it, go to Lenovo Web site at:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Installing the driver for USB 3.0
If your computer supports USB 3.0, and you have reinstalled the operating system, you need to download
and install the USB 3.0 driver to use the USB 3.0. Do the following:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista
1. Access Lenovo Web site http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. When you get to the site, find
your model and display the driver links.
2. Select the USB 3.0 driver for 32-bit or 64-bit and extract it to your local hard disk.
3. Double-click Setup.exe in C:\DRIVERS\WIN\USB3.0\.
4. Click Next. If the device driver is already installed, click Cancel. Follow the instructions on the screen
until the installation is finished.
For Windows XP
1. Access Lenovo Web site http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. When you get to the site, find
your model and display the driver links.
2. Select the USB 3.0 driver for 32-bit and extract it to your local hard disk.
3. Double-click Setup.exe in C:\DRIVERS\WIN\USB3.0\.
Click Next. If the device driver is already installed, click Cancel. Follow the instructions on the screen
until the installation is finished.
Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7
ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 is in the following directory:
C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\MONITOR.
Note: If you cannot find this directory on your hard disk drive or solid state drive, download the ThinkPad
Monitor File for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 from the ThinkPad Web site at:
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers
Note: Before you install this file, make sure that the correct video driver has been installed.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
199
For Windows 7
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display at the left.
3. Click Change display settings.
4. Click Advanced Settings.
5. Click the Monitor tab.
6. Click Properties.
7. Click the Driver tab.
8. Click Update Driver.
9. Select Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device
drivers on my computer.
10. Click Have Disk.
11. Specify path “C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\MONITOR” to this monitor INF then click Open.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm the correct display type, then click Next.
14. Windows has finished installing. Click Close.
15. Click Close for Display Properties.
16. Click OK in the Monitor tab.
17. Click OK and close the Display Settings window.
For Windows Vista
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display Settings. The Display Settings window opens.
3. Click Advanced Settings.
4. Click the Monitor tab.
5. Click Properties. (For Windows Vista, also click Continue.)
6. Click the Driver tab.
7. Click Update Driver.
8. Select Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device
drivers on my computer.
9. Click Have Disk.
10. Specify path “C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\MONITOR” to this monitor INF then click Open.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm the correct display type, then click Next.
13. Windows has finished installing. Click Close.
14. Click Close for Display Properties.
15. Click OK in the Monitor tab.
16. Click OK and close the Display Settings window.
For Windows XP
1. Right-click on the desktop and select Properties from the pop up menu.
2. Select the Settings tab.
200
User Guide
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select the Monitor tab.
5. Select Plug and Play Monitor from the monitor type list.
6. Click Properties.
7. Select the Driver tab and click Update Driver. The Hardware Update Wizard starts.
8. Select No, not this time for Windows Update connection, and then click Next.
9. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced).
10. Click Next.
11. Select Don't search, I will choose the driver to install.
12. Click Next.
13. Click Have Disk.
14. Click Browse.
15. Specify “C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS\MONITOR” as location directory and select TPLCD.INF.
16. Click OK.
17. System will show ThinkPad Display. Click Next. System will copy ThinkPad Monitor INF file and color
profile.
18. Click Finish and then Close.
19. Click the Color Management tab.
20. Click Add.
21. Select TPFLX.ICM or TPLCD.ICM and click Add.
22. Click OK and close the Display Properties window.
ThinkPad Setup
Your computer provides a program, called ThinkPad Setup, that enables you to select various setup
parameters.
To start ThinkPad Setup, do as follows:
1. To protect yourself against accidental loss of data, back up your computer registry. See “Performing
backup and recovery operations” on page 113.
2. If the diskette drive is connected to the computer, remove any diskette from the diskette drive, and
then turn off the computer.
3. Turn on the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press the F1 key. The ThinkPad Setup opens.
If you have set a supervisor password, the ThinkPad Setup menu appears after you enter the password.
You can start the ThinkPad Setup by pressing Enter instead of entering the supervisor password;
however, you cannot change the parameters that are protected by the supervisor password. For more
information, refer to “Using Passwords” on page 97.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
201
An example of the ThinkPad Setup menu is shown as below:
4. Using the cursor keys, move to an item you want to change. When the item you want is highlighted,
press Enter. A submenu is displayed.
5. Change the items you wish to change. To change the value of an item, press +/-. If the item has a
submenu, you can display it by pressing Enter.
6. Press Esc to exit from the submenu.
7. If you are in a nested submenu, press Esc repeatedly until you reach the ThinkPad Setup menu.
Note: If you need to restore the settings to their original state as of the time of purchase, press F9 to
load the default settings. You can also select an option in the Restart submenu to load the default
settings or discard the changes.
8. Select Restart. Move the cursor to the option you want for restarting your computer; then press Enter.
Your computer restarts.
Config menu
If you need to change the configuration of your computer, select Config from the ThinkPad Setup menu.
Notes:
• The default settings are already optimized for you. If you consider changing the computer configuration,
proceed with extreme caution. Setting the configuration incorrectly might cause unexpected results.
• In each submenu, press the Enter key to show selectable options and select a desired option by using
cursor key, or type desired values from the keyboard directly.
The following submenu is displayed:
• Network: Set the LAN related functions.
• USB: Enable or disable USB related functions.
• Keyboard/Mouse: Set the keyboard and the mouse related functions.
• Display: Specify the settings for display output.
• Power: Set power management related functions.
• Beep and Alarm: Enable or disable the audio related functions.
• Serial ATA (SATA): Specify the settings for the hard disk drive.
• CPU: Specify the settings for the CPU.
• Intel AMT: Set the Intel® AMT related functions.
202
User Guide
Date and time menu
If you need to set the current date and time of your computer, select Date/Time from the ThinkPad Setup
menu. The following submenu is displayed:
• System Date
• System Time
To change the date and time, do the following:
1. Using the up and down arrow keys, select the item to change-date or time.
2. Press Tab, Shift Tab, or Enter to select a field.
3. Type the date or time.
Note: Another way to adjust date and time is press the - or + key.
Security menu
If you need to set the security features of your computer, select Security from the ThinkPad Setup menu.
Notes:
• The default settings are already optimized for you. If you consider changing the computer configuration,
proceed with extreme caution. Setting the configuration incorrectly might cause unexpected results.
• In each submenu, you can enable a function by selecting Enabled, or disable it by selecting Disabled.
The following submenu is displayed:
• Password: Set a password related functions.
• Fingerprint: Set the fingerprint reader related functions.
• Security Chip: Set the security chip related functions.
• UEFI BIOS Update Option: Specify the settings for Flash UEFI BIOS update.
• Memory Protection: Specify the settings for the Data Execution Prevention feature.
• Virtualization: Enable or disable the settings for Intel Virtualization Technology and Intel VT-d Feature.
• I/O Port Access: Enable or disable the access to individual I/O ports.
• Anti-Theft: Enable or disable UEFI BIOS interface to activate Anti-Theft services, such as Intel AT and
Computrace.
To set a password related functions, go to the Security menu and select Password. The following submenu
is displayed:
• Hardware Password Manager
• Supervisor Password
• Lock UEFI BIOS Settings
• Set Minimum Length
• Password at unattended boot
• Password at restart
• Power-On Password
• Hard Disk x Password
Notes:
• Hard Disk 1 means the hard disk drive built into your computer.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
203
• Hard Disk 2 appears on the Password submenu only if a hard disk drive is installed in the serial Ultrabay
enhanced.
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
If you select and enable Hardware Password Manager, you can manage your power-on password,
supervisor password, and your hard disk passwords by the management server. By default, this is set
to Enabled.
Lock UEFI BIOS Settings enable or disable the function that protects items in the ThinkPad Setup from
being changed by a user who does not have the supervisor password. By default, this is set to Disabled.
If you set the supervisor password and enable this function, no one but you can change any items in the
ThinkPad Setup.
If you select Set Minimum Length, you can specify a minimum length for power-on passwords and hard
disk passwords. By default, this is set to Disabled. If you set the supervisor password and specify a
minimum length for passwords, no one but you can change the length.
If you select and enable Password at unattended boot, a password prompt is displayed when the computer
is turned on, from either a power-off state or hibernation, by an unattended event such as Wake on LAN®. If
you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the operating
system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system.
If you select and enable Password at restart, a password prompt is displayed when you restart the
computer. If you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the
operating system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system.
Startup menu
You may need to change the startup sequence of your computer. For example, if you have different operating
systems on different devices, you can have the system start up from either of them.
Attention: After you change your startup sequence, you must be extremely careful not to specify a wrong
device during a copy, a save, or a format operation. If you specify a wrong device, your data and programs
might be erased or overwritten.
Attention: If you are using the BitLocker drive encryption, you should not change the startup sequence.
BitLocker drive encryption detects the change of startup sequence and locks the computer from booting.
Changing the startup sequence
Selecting the Startup to display the Boot submenu.
To change the startup sequence, do the following:
1. Select Boot; then press Enter.
• You can use the Boot submenu to specify the startup sequence that runs when you turn on the
power. Refer to “Boot submenu” on page 205.
• You can use the Network Boot to specify the top priority boot device that runs when Wake on
LAN is commonly used by LAN administrators in corporate networks to get remote access to your
computer. Refer to “Network Boot submenu” on page 205.
2. Select the device you want to start first.
Use these keys to set the order that the UEFI BIOS will use when starting an operating system:
• + or - key moves the device up or down.
204
User Guide
3. Press F10 to save the changes and restart the system.
To change the startup sequence temporarily so that the system starts up from a different drive, do the
following:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Turn on the computer; then, while the “To interrupt normal startup, press the blue ThinkVantage button”
message is displayed at the lower-left of the screen, press F12.
3. Select the device you want to start first from the Boot menu.
Note: The Boot menu will be shown when the system that cannot boot from any devices or operating
system was not found.
Boot submenu
The following list, showing the order in which devices will be started up, is always displayed. Even devices
that are not attached to or installed on your computer are listed. For each device that is attached to or
installed on the computer, information about it is presented after the colon.
1. USB CD:
2. USB FDD:
3. ATAPI CD0:
4. ATA HDD0:
5. ATA HDD1:
6. ATA HDD2:
7. USB HDD:
8. PCI LAN:
9. ATAPI CD1:
10. ATAPI CD2:
11. ATA HDD3:
12. ATA HDD4:
13. Other CD:
14. Other HDD:
Network Boot submenu
Use the Network Boot to select the boot device when the system wakes from LAN. If Wake on LAN is
enabled, the network administrator can turn on all of the computers in a LAN remotely by use of network
management software.
Other items in the Startup menu
The following items are also displayed in the Startup menu of the ThinkPad Setup:
• UEFI/Legacy Boot: Select system boot capability.
• UEFI/Legacy Boot Priority: Select priority of boot option between UEFI and Legacy.
• Boot Mode: Enable or disable the diagnostics boot mode.
• Option Key Display: Choose whether to show the option key message when the system is booted.
• Boot device List F12 Option: Choose whether to show the pop-up list of the boot devices.
• Boot Order Lock: Enable or disable the Boot Priority Order lock.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
205
Restart menu
If you need to close the ThinkPad Setup and restart the system, select Restart from the ThinkPad Setup
menu. The following submenu is displayed:
• Exit Saving Changes: Restart the system after saving the changes.
• Exit Discarding Changes: Restart the system without saving the changes.
• Load Setup Defaults: Load the default setting that was in effect at the time of purchase.
• Discard Changes: Discard the changes.
• Save Changes: Save the changes.
ThinkPad Setup items
The following tables show the contents of the Config menu, the Security menu, and the Startup menu
of the ThinkPad Setup.
Note: Some items are displayed on the menu only if the computer supports the corresponding features.
Notes:
• Enabled means that the function is configured.
• Disabled means that the function is not configured.
• Default values are in boldface.
Config menu items
Table 8. Config menu items
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
Network
Wake On LAN
• Disabled
Enable the system to Power
on when the Ethernet
controller receives a magic
packet.
• AC only
• AC and Battery
If you select “AC Only”,
Wake On LAN is enabled
only when ac power adapter
is attached.
If you select “AC and
Battery”, Wake On LAN is
enabled with any power
sources.
Note: AC is required with
magic packet type Wake
On LAN.
Note: Wake On LAN
function does not work
when a hard disk password
is set.
Ethernet LAN Option ROM
• Disabled
• Enabled
206
User Guide
Load the Ethernet LAN
Option ROM to enable
startup from an integrated
network device.
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
USB
USB UEFI BIOS Support
• Disabled
Enable or disable boot
support for USB diskette,
USB memory key, and USB
optical drive.
• Enabled
Always On USB
• Disabled
• Enabled
Always On USB Charge in
off mode
• Disabled
• Enabled
If you select “Enabled”, the
external USB devices can
be charged via USB ports
even when the system is in
low power mode (standby,
hibernate, or power-off).
If you select “Enabled”, the
Always On USB connector
enables you to charge
some devices, such as iPod
and iPhone and BlackBerry
smartphones.
Note: If you want to charge
these devices when your
computer is in hibernation
mode or powered off, you
will need to open the Power
Manager program and
configure corresponding
settings to enable the
Always On USB connector
function. For details
about how to enable the
Always On USB connector
function, refer to the online
help of the Power Manager
program.
Keyboard/Mouse
TrackPoint
• Disabled
• Enabled
Enable or disable the
built-in TrackPoint.
Note: If you want to use
an external mouse, select
“Disabled.”
Touch Pad
• Disabled
• Enabled
Enable or disable the
built-in touch pad.
Note: If you want to use
an external mouse, select
“Disabled.”
Fn and Ctrl Key swap
• Disabled
• Enabled
If you select “Enabled”, the
Fn key works as the Ctrl
key, and the Ctrl key works
as the Fn key.
Note: Even when
“Enabled” is selected,
you need to press the Fn
key to return the computer
from sleep mode to normal
operation.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
207
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
Fn Key Lock
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”,
you can press the Fn key
to keep it in a pressed
condition, and then press
the desired function key.
The action is equivalent to
pressing the required
key and the Fn key
simultaneously. If you
press the Fn key twice, the
state is locked until you
press the Fn key again.
• Enabled
ThinkPad NumLock
• Independent
• Synchronized
If you select “Independent”,
NumLock on your
computer can be disabled
independently regardless
of the NumLock state of
the external keyboard. If
NumLock on the computer
is enabled, NumLock on
the external keyboard will
also be enabled.
If you select
“Synchronized”, NumLock
on your computer and
NumLock on the external
keyboard are synchronized.
Power-On NumLock
• Automatic
• On
• Off
If you select “Automatic”,
NumLock is enabled
when full size keyboard is
attached.
If you select “On”,
NumLock is always
enabled.
If you select “Off”,
NumLock is always
disabled.
Note: Power-On NumLock
will be displayed if you
select “Synchronized” at
the ThinkPad NumLock.
208
User Guide
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
Display
Boot Display Device
• ThinkPad LCD
Select the display device
that is to be active at boot
time. This selection is
effective for boot time,
password prompt, and
ThinkPad Setup.
•
Analog (VGA)
• Digital on ThinkPad
• Digital 1 on dock
• Digital 2 on dock
“Digital on Thinkpad”
is DisplayPort on your
computer.
“Digial 1 on dock” and
“Digital 2 on dock” are
DisplayPort or DVI on
docking station.
Graphics Device
• Integrated Graphics
• Discrete Graphics
• NVIDIA Optimus
Integrated Graphics will
achieve longer battery life,
and Discrete Graphics
enhances performance.
NVIDIA Optimus runs as
Integrated Graphics mode
and Discrete Graphics is
enabled on demand.
Note: NVIDIA Optimus
mode should only be
selected if you are using a
Windows 7 model.
Power
OS Detection for NVIDIA
Optimus
• Disabled
Intel SpeedStep®
technology (Intel
SpeedStep mounted
models only)
• Disabled
System BIOS automatically
switches Graphics device
setting to NVIDIA Optimus
mode if the OS supports
the feature, and to Discrete
Graphics if the OS does not
support it.
• Enabled
Select the mode of Intel
SpeedStep technology at
runtime.
• Enabled
Mode for AC
• Maximum Performance
• Battery Optimized
Mode for Battery
• Maximum Performance
• Battery Optimized
Adaptive Thermal
Management
Scheme for AC
• Maximize Performance
Maximum Performance:
Always highest speed
Battery Optimized: Always
lowest speed
Disabled: No runtime
support, lowest speed
This selects a thermal
management scheme to
use.
• Balanced
Maximize Performance:
Reduces CPU throttling
Scheme for Battery
• Maximize Performance
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
209
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
• Balanced
Comments
Balanced: Balances
sound, temperature and
performance
Note: Each scheme affects
fan sound, temperature,
and performance.
Optical Drive Speed
• High Performance
• Normal
• Silent
CPU Power Management
• Disabled
• Enabled
PCI Express Power
Management
• Disabled
Power On with AC Attach
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled
Set the speed of optical
drive to the desired
performance.
Enable or disable the power
saving feature that stop
the microprocessor clock
automatically when there
are no system activities.
Normally, it is not necessary
to change the setting.
Enable or disable a feature
that automatically adjusts
power management when
there is no PCI Express
activity. Normally, it is not
necessary to change the
setting.
Enable or disable a feature
that powers on the system
when AC is attached.
If you select “Enabled”, the
system is powered on when
AC is attached. When the
system is in hibernate state,
the system resumes.
If you select “Disabled”, the
system is not powered on
nor resumed when AC is
attached.
Beep and Alarm
Power Control Beep
• Disabled
• Enabled
Low Battery Alarm
• Disabled
• Enabled
Password Beep
• Disabled
• Enabled
210
User Guide
If this function is enabled,
a beep sounds when the
computer enters a power
management mode, when it
resumes operational mode,
and when the ac power
adapter is connected or
disconnected.
Enable or disable the low
battery alarm.
Enable this option to have
a beep sound when the
system is waiting for a
power-on, hard disk, or
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
supervisor password.
Different beeps will be
sounded when the entered
password matches or does
not match the configured
password.
Keyboard Beep
• Enabled
• Disabled
Serial ATA (SATA)
SATA Controller Mode
Option
• Compatibility
• AHCI
• RAID
CPU
Core Multi-Processing
• Disabled
• Enabled
Enable or disable keyboard
beep when unmanageable
key combinations are
pressed.
Select SATA controller
operation mode. If your
system supports RAID,
select “RAID.” If you select
“Compatibility mode”,
serial SATA controller
operates in compatibility
mode.
Enable or disable additional
execution core units within
a CPU.
Note: If you are using a
computer with a single-core
processor, this item does
not appear.
Note: For Core
Multi-Processing, refer
to the instructions in
“Installing Windows XP” on
page 196.
Intel AMT
Intel Hyper-Threading
Technology
• Disabled
Intel AMT Control
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled
Enable or disable additional
logical processors within a
processor core.
If you select “Enabled”, Intel
AMT (Active Management
Technology) is configured
and additional setup items
are provided in MEBx
(Management Engine BIOS
Extension) Setup.
Note: You can enter MEBx
Setup menu by pressing
Ctrl-P key combination in
Startup Interrupt Menu. To
display the Startup Interrupt
Menu, press ThinkVantage
button or Enter key during
POST.
CIRA Timeout
0-255
Set timeout option for
CIRA connection to be
established. 1 though 254
seconds are selectable.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
211
Table 8. Config menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
If you select “0”, use 60
seconds as default timeout
value.
If you select “255”, waiting
time for establishing a
connection is unlimited.
Console Type
• PC-ANSI
• VT100+
Select the console type for
AMT.
• VT-UTF8
Note: This console type
should match the Intel AMT
remote console.
Selection
Comments
Security menu items
Table 9. Security menu items
Menu item
Submenu item
Password
Fingerprint
Refer to “Security menu”
on page 203 and “Using
passwords” on page 97.
Predesktop Authentication
• Disabled
• Enabled
Reader Priority
• External ➙ Internal
• Internal Only
Security Mode
• Normal
• High
Password Authentication
• Disabled
• Enabled
Reset Fingerprint Data
212
User Guide
• Enter
Enable or disable fingerprint
authentication before the
operating system is loaded.
If External ➙ Internal
is selected, an external
fingerprint reader is used
if attached. Otherwise, an
internal fingerprint reader
is used. If Internal Only
is selected, an internal
fingerprint reader is used.
If fingerprint authentication
fails, you can still start
the computer by entering
a password. If you have
selected “Normal”, enter a
power-on password or a
supervisor password; if you
have selected “High”, enter
a supervisor password.
Enable or disable password
authentication. If high
security mode is selected,
this item appears.
This option is used to erase
all fingerprint data stored
in the fingerprint reader
and reset settings to the
factory state (ex. Power-on
security, LEDs, etc.) As
a result, any power-on
security features previously
Table 9. Security menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
enabled will not be able
to work until they are
re-enabled in the fingerprint
software.
Security Chip
Security Chip
• Active
• Inactive
• Disabled
If you select “Active”,
Security Chip is functional.
If you select “Inactive”,
Security Chip is visible, but
is not functional. If you
select “Disabled”, Security
Chip is hidden and is not
functional.
Enable or disable the
following Security
Reporting Options.
Security Reporting Options
• BIOS ROM String
Reporting: BIOS text
string
• ESCD Reporting:
Extended system
configuration data
• CMOS Reporting:
CMOS data
• NVRAM Reporting:
Security data stored in
the Asset ID
• SMBIOS Reporting:
SMBIOS data
Clear Security Chip
• Enter
Clear the encryption key.
Note: Only if you select
“Active” for Security Chip,
this item appears.
Intel TXT Feature
• Disabled
• Enabled
UEFI BIOS Update Option
Flash BIOS Updating by
End-Users
• Disabled
Flash Over LAN
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled
Enable or disable Intel
Trusted Execution
Technology.
If you select “Enabled”,
all users can update the
UEFI BIOS. If you select
“Disabled”, only the person
who knows supervisor
password can update the
UEFI BIOS.
Enable your computer's
UEFI BIOS to be updated
(flashed) over an active
network connection.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
213
Table 9. Security menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
Memory Protection
Execution Prevention
• Disabled
Some computer viruses
and worms cause memory
buffers to overflow by
running code where only
data is allowed. If the
Data Execution Prevention
feature can be used with
your operating system, then
by selecting “Enabled” you
can protect your computer
against attacks by such
viruses and worms. If after
choosing “Enabled” you
find that an application
program does not run
correctly, select “Disabled”
and reset the setting.
• Enabled
Virtualization
Intel Virtualization
Technology
• Disabled
Intel VT-d Feature
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled
I/O Port Access
Ethernet LAN
• Disabled
• Enabled
Wireless LAN
• Disabled
• Enabled
WiMAX
• Disabled
• Enabled
Wireless WAN
• Disabled
• Enabled
Bluetooth
• Disabled
• Enabled
Modem
• Disabled
• Enabled
USB Port
• Disabled
• Enabled
IEEE 1394
• Disabled
• Enabled
214
User Guide
If you select “Enabled,”
a VMM (Virtual Machine
Monitor) can utilize the
additional hardware
capabilities provided
by Intel Virtualization
Technology.
Intel VT-d is Intel
Virtualization Technology
for Directed I/O. When
enabled, a VMM can utilize
the platform infrastructure
for I/O virtualization.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the Ethernet LAN
device.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the Wireless LAN
device.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the WiMAX device.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the Wireless WAN
device.
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the Bluetooth
device.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the Modem device.
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the USB port.
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the IEEE 1394
(Firewire) device.
Table 9. Security menu items (continued)
Menu item
Submenu item
Selection
Comments
ExpressCard Slot
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the ExpressCard
Slot.
• Enabled
Ultrabay (HDD/Optical)
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the Ultrabay
(HDD/Optical) device.
• Enabled
eSATA Port
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the eSATA Port.
• Enabled
Memory Card Slot
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the
Memory Card slot (SD
Card/MultiMediaCard).
• Enabled
Integrated Camera
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the Integrated
Camera.
• Enabled
Microphone
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”, you
can use the Microphone
(Internal, External, or
Line-In).
• Enabled
Fingerprint Reader
• Disabled
If you select “Enabled”,
you can use the fingerprint
reader.
• Enabled
Anti-Theft
Intel AT Module Activation
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Permanently Disabled
Enable or disable the UEFI
BIOS interface to activate
Intel AT module that is an
optional Anti-Theft service
from Intel.
Note: If you set the Intel
AT module activation to
“Permanently Disabled”,
you will be unable to enable
this setting again.
Computrace Module
Activation
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Permanently Disabled
Enable or disable the UEFI
BIOS interface to activate
Computrace module.
Computrace is an optional
monitoring service from
Absolute Software.
Note: If you set the
Computrace module
activation to “Permanently
Disabled”, you will be
unable to enable this
setting again.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
215
Startup menu items
Table 10. Startup menu items
Menu item
Selection
Comments
Boot
Refer to “Startup menu” on page 204.
Network Boot
Refer to “Startup menu” on page 204.
UEFI/Legacy Boot
• Both
Select system boot capability.
• UEFI Only
• Both: System will boot by
following UEFI/Legacy Boot
Priority setting.
• Legacy Only
• UEFI Only: System will boot from
UEFI enabled OS.
• Legacy Only: System will boot
from any OS other than UEFI
enabled OS.
Note: If you select “UEFI Only”,
system cannot boot from the
bootable devices which do not have
UEFI enabled OS.
UEFI/Legacy Boot Priority
Boot Mode
• UEFI First
• Legacy First
Select priority of boot option between
UEFI and Legacy.
• Quick
Screen during POST:
• Diagnostics
• Quick: ThinkPad Logo screen is
displayed.
Note: You can also enter the
“Diagnostic” mode by pressing Esc
during POST.
Option Keys display (ThinkVantage
button message)
• Disabled
Boot Device List F12 Option
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled
Boot Order Lock
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Diagnostics: Text messages are
displayed.
If you select “Disabled”, the “To
interrupt normal startup, press the
blue ThinkVantage button.” message
is not displayed during POST.
If you select “Enabled”, the F12 key
is recognized and the Boot Menu is
displayed.
If you select “Enabled”, the Boot
Priority Order is locked for your future
use.
Updating your system UEFI BIOS
The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) BIOS is a part of the system programs that make up the
basic layer of software built into your computer. UEFI BIOS translates the instructions from other software
layers.
Your computer system board has a module called electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM, also referred to as flash memory). You can update UEFI BIOS and the Configuration/ThinkPad
Setup program by starting your computer with a flash update optical disc or flash update tool application
running on the Windows environment.
In some instances when you add software, hardware, or a device driver, you may be informed that you need
to update your UEFI BIOS in order for the new addition to work properly.
216
User Guide
To update your UEFI BIOS, go to this Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers, and follow
the instructions on the screen.
Using system management
This section is intended primarily for network administrators.
Your computer is designed for manageability, so that you can redirect more of your resources to better
meet your business objectives.
This manageability, or “Total Cost of Ownership” (TCO), enables you to remotely power on your computer,
format the hard disk drive, install the software of your choice (for example, Windows XP with user and
system-management applications), and have the computer start up and function in the same way as an
ordinary desktop PC.
Once the computer is configured and operational, you can manage it by use of software and manageability
features already integrated into the client system and the network.
System management
Check the following topics to learn more about features of System Management:
• Desktop Management Interface
• Preboot eXecution Environment
• Wake on LAN
• Resume on incoming call
• Asset ID EEPROM
Desktop Management Interface
The system BIOS (UEFI BIOS) of your computer supports an interface called System Management BIOS
Reference Specification (SMBIOS) V2.6.1. SMBIOS provides information about the hardware components
of your system. It is the responsibility of the BIOS to supply this database with information about itself
and the devices on the system board. This specification documents the standards for getting access to
this BIOS information.
Preboot eXecution Environment
Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) technology makes your computer more manageable (it is PXE
2.1-compliant) by enabling it to boot (load an operating system or another executable image) from a server.
Your computer supports the PC functions that PXE requires. For example, with the appropriate LAN card,
your computer can be booted from the PXE server.
Note: Remote Program Load (RPL) cannot be used with your computer.
Wake on LAN
A network administrator can use Wake on LAN to turn on a computer from a management console.
When Wake on LAN is used with network management software, many functions, such as data transfer,
software updates, and Flash updates of UEFI BIOS, can be performed remotely without remote attendance.
This updating can be done after normal working hours and on weekends, to save time and increase
productivity. Users are not interrupted during normal working hours, and LAN traffic is kept to a minimum.
If a computer is turned on by the Wake on LAN function, the Network Boot sequence is used.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
217
Resume on incoming call
If your computer is connected to a telephone line and you have specified Resume on incoming call, it will
return from sleep (standby) mode to normal operation when a telephone call comes in.
To enable your computer to wake up from sleep (standby) mode, do the following:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation. The Device Manager window opens.
4. Double-click Modems (in Windows Vista, click the + mark for Modems), and then click your modem.
5. Click the Power Management tab.
6. Select the Allow this device to wake the computer check box.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance.
3. Click System.
4. Click the Hardware tab.
5. Click the Device Manager button. The Device Manager window opens.
6. Click the + mark for Modems, and then click your modem.
7. Click Action, and then click Properties.
8. Click the Power Management tab.
9. Select the Allow this device to bring the computer out of Standby check box.
Asset ID EEPROM
The Asset ID EEPROM contains information about the system, including its configuration and the serial
numbers of key components. It also includes a number of blank fields in which you can record information
about the end users in your network.
Setting management features
To enable the network administrator to control your computer remotely, you must configure the network
interface by setting the system-management features in the ThinkPad Setup program. You can configure
the following:
• Wake on LAN
• Network Boot sequence
• Flash update
If an administrator's password (supervisor password) has been set, you will need to specify it when you start
the ThinkPad Setup, so that you can use these functions.
Wake on LAN
When the Wake on LAN feature is enabled on a computer that is connected to a LAN, a network administrator
can start the computer remotely from a management console, using remote network-management software.
218
User Guide
Setting up in the ThinkPad Setup
To enable or disable Wake on LAN, go to the ThinkPad Setup menu. When your computer is not under the
network administrator's system management, you can disable Wake on LAN.
To set this function, do the following:
1. Start the ThinkPad Setup menu.
2. Select Config.
3. The Config submenu appears.
4. Select Network.
5. The Network item submenu appears.
6. For Wake On LAN, select one of the following: AC Only, AC and Battery, or Disabled.
7. Press F10.
Network Boot sequence
When your computer is turned on remotely, system will try to boot from the device that is selected by
Network Boot setting, and then follow the boot order list in the Boot menu.
To define a sequence:
1. On the ThinkPad Setup menu, select Startup. The Startup submenu appears.
2. Select Network Boot and press Enter key to show pop-up boot device list.
3. Select a boot device from the list to make it as top boot priority.
4. Press F10.
Note: If you want to initialize the setting to return to the default startup sequence, press F9. The default
settings are automatically reloaded.
Flash update
When a flash update of UEFI BIOS from the network is enabled, a network administrator can remotely
update the system programs in your computer from a management console. The following requirements
must be met:
• Update Flash from network must also be enabled; the procedure is given below.
• Your computer must be started over the LAN.
• Your computer must be engaged in a Preboot eXecution Environment.
• Network-management software must be installed in the remote administrator's computer.
To enable or disable the Flash update from the network setting, do the following:
1. On the ThinkPad Setup menu, select Security. The Security submenu appears.
2. Select UEFI BIOS Update Option. The UEFI BIOS Update Option submenu appears.
3. For Flash Over LAN, select either Enabled or Disabled.
4. Press F10.
Chapter 8. Advanced configuration
219
220
User Guide
Chapter 9. Preventing problems
An important part of owning a ThinkPad notebook is maintenance. With proper care, you can avoid
common problems. The following sections provide information that can help you to keep your computer
running smoothly.
•
“General tips for preventing problems” on page 221
•
“Making sure device drivers are current” on page 222
•
“Taking care of your computer” on page 222
General tips for preventing problems
1. Check the capacity of your hard disk drive from time to time. If the hard disk drive gets too full, Windows
will slow down and might produce errors.
Note: In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, click Start ➙ Computer. In Windows XP, click Start ➙
My Computer.
2. Empty your recycle bin on a regular basis.
3. Use disk defragment tool regularly on your hard disk drive to improve data seek and read times.
4. To free up disk space, uninstall unused application programs.
Note: You might also want to look for application program duplication or overlapping versions.
5. Clean out your Inbox, Sent, and Trash folders from your e-mail client program.
6. At least once a week, make a point to back up your data. If critical data is present, it is a good idea
to perform a daily backup. Lenovo has many backup options available for your computer. Rewritable
optical drives are available for most machines and are easily installed.
7. Use or schedule System Restore to take a system snapshot periodically. For more information about
System Restore, see Chapter 5 “Recovery overview” on page 111.
8. Update device drivers and UEFI BIOS when needed.
9. Profile your machine at http://support.lenovo.com to keep up to date with current drivers and revisions.
10. Keep up to date for device drivers on other non-Lenovo hardware. You might want to read the device
driver information release notes prior to updating for compatibility or known issues.
11. Keep a log book. Entries might include major hardware or software changes, driver updates, minor
issues you have experienced and how you resolved them.
12. If you ever need to run a recovery on your computer to return the preload onto the machine, the
following tips might help along the way:
• Remove all external devices such as the printer, keyboard, etc.
• Make sure that your battery is charged and that you have the ac power connected.
• Boot into the ThinkPad Setup and load the default settings.
• Restart the machine and start the recovery.
• If your machine uses discs as the recovery media, DO NOT remove the disc from the drive until
prompted to do so.
13. For suspected hard disk drive issues, refer to “Diagnosing problems” on page 227 to run a
diagnostic test of the drive before you call the Customer Support Center. If your computer does
not start up, download the files to create a bootable self-test media from the following Web site:
http://www.lenovo.com/hddtest. Run the test and record any messages or error codes. If the test
returns any failing error codes or messages, call the Customer Support Center with the codes or
messages and the computer in front of you. A technician will assist you further.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
221
14. If required, you can find your country's Customer Support Center at the following Web address:
http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. When calling the Customer Support Center, please make sure
you have your machine model type, serial number and the computer in front of you. Also, if the machine
is producing error codes, it is helpful to have the error screen on or the message written down.
Making sure device drivers are current
Device drivers are programs that contain instructions for the operating system about how to operate or
“drive” a certain piece of hardware. Each hardware component on your computer has its own specific driver.
If you add a new component, the operating system needs to be instructed on how to operate that piece
of hardware. After you install the driver, the operating system can recognize the hardware component
and understand how to use it.
Note: Because drivers are programs, like any other file on your computer, they are susceptible to corruption
and might not perform properly if corruption occurs.
It is not always necessary to download the latest drivers. However, you should download the latest driver
for a component if you notice poor performance from that component or if you added a new component.
This may eliminate the driver as the potential cause of the problem.
Getting the latest drivers from the Web site
You can download and install updated device drivers from the Lenovo Web site by doing the following:
1. Connect to the Internet.
2. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers.
3. Follow the directions on the screen and install the necessary software.
Getting the latest drivers using System Update
The System Update program helps you keep the software on your system up-to-date. Update packages are
stored on Lenovo servers and can be downloaded from the Lenovo Support Web site. Update packages can
contain applications, device drivers, UEFI BIOS flashes, or software updates. When the System Update
program connects to the Lenovo Support Web site, the System Update program automatically recognizes
the machine type and model of your computer, the installed operating system, and the language of the
operating system to determine what updates are available for your computer. The System Update program
then displays a list of update packages and categorizes each update as critical, recommended, and
optional to help you understand the importance. You have complete control of which updates to download
and install. After you select the update packages you want, the System Update program automatically
downloads and installs the updates without any further intervention from you.
The System Update program is preinstalled on your computer and is ready to run. The only prerequisite is
an active Internet connection. You can start the program manually, or you can use the schedule feature
to enable the program to search for updates automatically at specified intervals. You also can predefine
scheduled updates to search by severity (critical updates, critical and recommended updates, or all updates)
so the list you choose from contains only those update types that are of interest to you.
For more information about how to use the System Update, refer to “System Update” on page 28.
Taking care of your computer
Although your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments, you need to use
common sense in handling it. By following these important tips, you will get the most use and enjoyment
out of your computer.
222
User Guide
Be careful about where and how you work
• Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic
bags.
• Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers
(within 13 cm or 5 inch).
• Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5°C/41°F or above 35°C/95°F).
• Some appliances, such as certain portable desktop fans or air purifiers, can produce negative ions. If a
computer is close to such an appliance, and is exposed for an extended time to air containing negative
ions, it may become electrostatically charged. Such a charge may be discharged through your hands
when you touch the keyboard or other parts of the computer, or through connectors on I/O devices
connected to it. Even though this kind of electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the opposite of a discharge from
your body or clothing to the computer, it poses the same risk of a computer malfunction.
Your computer is designed and manufactured to minimize any effects of electrostatic charge. An electrostatic
charge above a certain limit, however, can increase the risk of ESD. Therefore, when using the computer
close to an appliance that can produce negative ions, give special attention to the following:
• Avoid directly exposing your computer to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions.
• Keep your computer and peripherals as far as possible from such an appliance.
• Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge.
Note: Not all such appliances cause a significant electrostatic charge.
Be gentle with your computer
• Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest.
• Your computer display is designed to be opened and used at an angle slightly greater than 90 degrees.
Do not open the display beyond 180 degrees, as this might damage the computer hinge.
• Do not turn your computer over while the ac power adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter
plug.
Carry your computer properly
• Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect
cords and cables.
• When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by
the display.
Handle storage media and drives properly
• If your computer comes with an optical drive, do not touch the surface of a disc or the lens on the tray.
• Wait until you hear the CD or DVD click into the center pivot of the drive before closing the tray.
• On your computer, use only optical drives designed for use with the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
Note: You can install a 9.5-mm-thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12.7-mm-thick serial Ultrabay enhanced
device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced.
• When installing the hard disk drive, solid state drive, or optical drive, follow the instructions shipped with
your hardware, and apply pressure only where needed on the device.
• Turn off your computer if you are replacing the hard disk drive or solid state drive.
• When replacing the primary hard disk drive or solid state drive, reattach the cover of the drive slot.
• Store your external and removable hard disk or optical drives in the appropriate containers or packaging
when they are not being used.
Chapter 9. Preventing problems
223
• Before you install any of the following devices, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action
reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device.
– Memory module
– Mini-PCI Card
– ExpressCard
– CompactFlash
– Smart card
– Memory Card, such as SD Card, SDHC Card, SDXC Card, and MultiMediaCard.
Note: Not all listed devices are included in your computer.
This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device.
• When transferring data to or from a flash media card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer
in sleep (standby) or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete. To do so might cause
damage to your data.
Take care in setting passwords
• Remember your passwords. If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password, Lenovo will not reset it, and
you might have to replace your system board, or hard disk drive or solid state drive.
Care for the fingerprint reader
The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly:
• Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard, pointed object.
• Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard.
• Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger.
If you notice any of the following conditions, gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free
cloth:
• The surface of the reader is dirty or stained.
• The surface of the reader is wet.
• The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint.
Register your computer
• Register your ThinkPad products with Lenovo (refer to the Web page: http://www.lenovo.com/register).
This can help authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen. Registering your computer also
enables Lenovo to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades.
Be sure not to modify your computer
• Only an authorized ThinkPad repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer.
• Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed.
Tips on using the built-in modem
• Your computer modem may use only an analog telephone network, or public-switched telephone network
(PSTN). Do not connect the modem to a PBX (private branch exchange) or any other digital telephone
extension line because this could damage your modem. Analog phone lines are often used in homes,
while digital phone lines are often used in hotels or office buildings. If you are not sure which kind of
phone line you are using, contact your telephone company.
224
User Guide
• Your computer might have both an Ethernet connector and a modem connector. If so, be sure to connect
your communication cable to the correct one.
DANGER
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet
connector.
Cleaning the cover of your computer
Occasionally clean your computer as follows:
1. Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen-use detergent (one that does not contain abrasive powder or
strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline). Use 5 parts water to 1 part detergent.
2. Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge.
3. Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge.
4. Wipe the cover with the sponge, using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip.
5. Wipe the surface to remove the detergent.
6. Rinse the sponge with clean running water.
7. Wipe the cover with the clean sponge.
8. Wipe the surface again with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
9. Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any fibers from the cloth.
Cleaning your computer keyboard
1. Apply some isopropyl rubbing alcohol to a soft, dust-free cloth.
2. Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth. Wipe the keys one by one; if you wipe several keys at a time,
the cloth may hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Make sure that no liquid drips onto
or between the keys.
3. Allow to dry.
4. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush
or cool air from a hair dryer.
Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the display or the keyboard.
Cleaning your computer display
1. Gently wipe the display with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If you see a scratchlike mark on your display,
it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard or the TrackPoint pointing stick when the cover was
pressed from the outside.
2. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth.
3. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or a 50-50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and
water that does not contain impurities.
4. Wring out as much of the liquid as you can.
5. Wipe the display again; do not let any liquid drip into the computer.
6. Be sure to dry the display before closing it.
Chapter 9. Preventing problems
225
226
User Guide
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
This section tells what to do if you have a computer problem.
•
“Diagnosing problems” on page 227
•
“Troubleshooting” on page 228
Diagnosing problems
If you experience problems with your computer, use diagnostic solutions as a starting point for solving them.
Depending on the preinstalled operating system and the date when your computer was manufactured,
Lenovo provides one of the following diagnostic solutions:
• Lenovo Solution Center: See “Using the Lenovo Solution Center program” on page 227.
• Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox: See “Using the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program” on page 227.
• Web-based diagnostic solutions: See “Using the Lenovo Support Web site” on page 228.
Using the Lenovo Solution Center program
Note: The Lenovo Solution Center program is available only on some models that are preinstalled with the
Windows 7 operating system. If your Windows 7 model is not preinstalled with the program, you can
download it from http://www.lenovo.com/diagnose.
The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It
combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along
with hints and tips for maximum system performance.
When you are setting up your computer, the Lenovo Solution Center program prompts you to create recovery
media, which you can use to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default state. For more information,
see “Creating and using recovery media” on page 111.
To run the Lenovo Solution Center program, see “Accessing applications in Windows 7” on page 23.
For additional information, refer to the Lenovo Solution Center help system.
Note: If you are unable to isolate and repair the problem yourself after running the program, save and print
the log files created by the program. You will need the log files when you speak to a Lenovo technical
support representative.
Using the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program
The Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program enables you to view symptoms of computer problems and find
solutions for them. It also includes automatic notification when action is required, computing assistance,
advanced diagnostics, and diagnostic history.
If the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program is available on your computer, do either of the following to
run the program:
• For Window 7: Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ System and Security ➙ Lenovo - System Healthy
and Diagnostics.
• For Windows XP and Windows Vista: Click Start ➙ All programs ➙ ThinkVantage ➙ Lenovo
ThinkVantage Toolbox.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
227
When the application is launched, select a diagnostic test to run. If there is any problem, besides the error
messages, a guidance also will be displayed to guide you to fix the problem.
For additional information, refer to the ThinkVantage Toolbox help system.
Note: If you are unable to isolate and repair the problem yourself after running the program, save and print
the log files created by the program. You will need the log files when you speak to a Lenovo technical
support representative.
Using the Lenovo Support Web site
If your computer has neither the Lenovo Solution Center program nor the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox
program installed, go to http://www.lenovo.com/diagnose for the latest information on diagnostics for your
computer.
Note: Running any test might take up to several minutes or longer. Make sure that you have time to run the
entire test. Do not interrupt the test while it is running.
Troubleshooting
If your computer has an error, it typically displays a message or an error code, or a beep sounds when you
turn it on. To correct an error, first find the description of the error in the left-hand column of the chart that
applies. Then click that description to get a troubleshooting procedure.
To make sure that your computer has the features or options that are introduced in the following sections,
consult the online help or the list shipped with your computer.
Computer stops responding
Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later.
If your computer is completely unresponsive (you cannot use the UltraNav pointing device or the keyboard),
do the following steps:
1. Push and hold the power switch until the machine turns off. After the computer is turned off, restart by
pressing the power switch. If the machine does not turn on, continue to step 2.
Note: Do not remove the battery and ac power to reset the computer.
2. While the machine is turned off, remove all power sources from the computer (battery and ac power).
Hold down the power button for 10 seconds. Plug in the ac power while keeping the battery out of the
computer. If the computer does not turn back on, continue to step 3.
Note: Once the computer starts up and enters Windows, use the proper shutdown procedure to turn
the computer off. Once the machine is off, reattach the battery and restart the computer. If the
computer does not start with the battery reattached, remove the battery and again start with step 2. If
the computer starts with ac power but does not start when the battery is attached, call the Customer
Support Center for support.
3. While the machine is off, remove all sources of power from the machine (battery and ac power). Remove
all external devices that are attached to your computer (keyboard, mouse, printer, scanner, etc.). Repeat
step 2. If step 2 is unsuccessful, continue to step 4.
Note: The following steps involve removing static sensitive components from your computer. Please
make sure that you are properly grounded and remove all sources of power attached to the computer.
If you are uncomfortable or unsure about removing components please call the Customer Support
Center for assistance.
228
User Guide
4. While the computer is off, remove all sources of power and external hardware. Refer to the procedure in
“Replacing memory” on page 135 on how to remove and reseat the memory modules. Remove any
non-original memory module added to your computer. After removing the extra memory module and
reseating the original memory module, repeat step 2. If the computer still does not turn on, consult the
user's reference guide for other customer-replaceable components that are attached to your computer.
If the computer still does not start up, call the Customer Support Center and a Customer Support Specialist
will assist you.
Spills on the keyboard
With a mobile computer, there are increased chances of spilling liquids on the keyboard. Because most
liquids conduct electricity, liquid spilled on the keyboard could create numerous short circuits, potentially
causing irreparable damage to your computer.
If you spill something on your computer:
Attention: Be sure that no liquid creates a short circuit between you and the ac power adapter (if in use).
Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer
on might make your computer unusable.
1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter immediately.
2. Turn off the computer immediately. If the computer does not turn off, remove the battery. The more
quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage
from short circuits.
3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer.
Note: If you want to replace your keyboard, you can purchase a new one.
Error messages
• Message: 0176: System Security - The System has been tampered with.
Solution: This message is displayed if you remove the Security Chip and reinstall it, or install a new one.
To clear the error, enter the ThinkPad Setup. If this does not solve the problem, have the computer
serviced.
• Message: 0177: Bad SVP data, stop POST task.
Solution: Checksum of the supervisor password in the EEPROM is not correct. The system board
should be replaced. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0182: Bad CRC of Security Settings in EEPROM. Enter ThinkPad Setup.
Solution: Checksum of the Security settings in the EEPROM is not correct. Enter ThinkPad Setup to
check Security settings, Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system.
If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0183: Bad CRC of Security Settings in EFI Variable. Enter ThinkPad Setup.
Solution: Checksum of the Security settings in the EFI Variable is not correct. Enter ThinkPad Setup to
check Security settings, Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system.
If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0187: EAIA data access error
Solution: The access to EEPROM is failed. Have the computer serviced.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
229
• Message: 0188: Invalid RFID Serialization Information Area
Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 0 and 1). The system board should be replaced,
and the box serial number needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0189: Invalid RFID configuration information area
Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 4 and 5). The system board should be replace,
and the UUID needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0190: Critical low-battery error
Solution: The computer turned off, because the battery is low. Connect the ac power adapter to the
computer and charge the battery, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.
• Message: 0191: System Security - Invalid remote change requested
Solution: The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. To clear the
error, enter ThinkPad Setup.
• Message: 0192: System Security - Embedded Security hardware tamper detected
Solution: The Security Chip has been replaced with a different one. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0199: System Security - Security password retry count exceeded.
Solution: This message is displayed if you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times.
Confirm the supervisor password and try again. To clear the error, enter ThinkPad Setup.
• Message: 0251: System CMOS checksum bad - Default configuration used
Solution: The system CMOS might have been corrupted by an application program. The computer uses
the default settings. Run ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code,
have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0253: EFI Variable Block Data was destroyed.
Solution: The system EFI Variable Block Data might have been corrupted.
1. Press F1 to enter ThinkPad Setup.
Press F9 and then press Enter to load the default setting.
2. Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system.
If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced.
• Message: 0271: Check date and time settings
Solution: Neither the date nor the time is set in the computer. Set the date and time, using ThinkPad
Setup.
• Message: 1802: Unauthorized network card is plugged in - Power off and remove the network card.
Solution: The mini PCI Express network card is not supported on this computer. Remove it.
• Message: 1820: More than one external fingerprint readers are attached.
Solution: Power off and remove all but the reader that you set up within your main operating system.
• Message: 2000: ThinkVantage Active Protection sensor diagnostics failed.
Solution: ThinkVantage Active Protection sensor is not working correctly. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 2100: Detection error on HDD0 (Main HDD)
230
User Guide
Solution: The hard disk is not working. Have the hard disk serviced.
• Message: 2101: Detection error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD)
Solution: The hard disk is not working. Have the hard disk serviced.
• Message: 2102: Detection error on HDD2 (Mini SATA)
Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced.
• Message: 2110: Read error on HDD0 (Main HDD)
Solution: The hard disk is not working. Have the hard disk serviced.
• Message: 2111: Read error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD)
Solution: The hard disk is not working. Have the hard disk serviced.
• Message: 2112: Read error on HDD2 (Mini SATA)
Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced.
• Message: 2200: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid.
Solution: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: 2201: Machine UUID is invalid.
Solution: Machine UUID is invalid. Have the computer serviced.
• Message: The power-on password prompt
Solution: A power-on password or a supervisor password is set. Type the password and press Enter to
use the computer (refer to “Using passwords” on page 97). If the power-on password is not accepted, a
supervisor password might have been set. Type the supervisor password and press Enter. If you still see
the same error message, have the computer serviced.
• Message: The hard disk password prompt
Solution: A hard disk password is set. Type the password and press Enter to use the computer (refer to
“Hard disk passwords” on page 99).
• Message: Hibernation error
Solution: The system configuration changed between the time your computer entered hibernation mode
and the time it left this mode, and your computer cannot resume normal operation.
– Restore the system configuration to what it was before your computer entered hibernation mode.
– If the memory size has been changed, re-create the hibernation file.
• Message: Fan error
Solution: Cooling fan has failed. Have the computer serviced.
Errors without messages
• Problem: My screen keeps blanking when I do not want it to.
Solution: You can disable any system timers, such as the LCD turn-off timer or the blank timer
1. Start Power Manager.
2. Click the Power plan tab (in Windows XP, Power scheme), and then select Maximum Performance
from the predefined power plans (in Windows XP, Power scheme).
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
231
• Problem: When I turn on the machine, nothing appears on the screen and the machine does not beep
while starting up.
Note: If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps, turn off the computer by pressing and holding
the power switch for 4 seconds or more. Turn it on and listen again.
Solution: Make sure that:
– The battery is installed correctly.
– The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working
electrical outlet.
– The computer is turned on. (Turn the power switch on again for confirmation.)
If a power-on password is set:
– Press any key to display the prompt for the power-on password. If the brightness level of the screen is
low, increase it by pressing Fn+Home.
– Type the correct password and press Enter (refer to “Power-on password” on page 98).
If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.
• Problem: When I turn on the machine, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen.
Solution: If you have modified a partition on your hard disk drive or solid state drive by using a partition
software, information about that partition, or the master boot record may have been destroyed.
1. Turn off the computer, and then turn it on again.
2. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, do the following:
– If you have used the partition software, examine the partition on the hard disk drive or solid state
drive by using the software, and recover the partition if required.
– Use either the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the recovery discs to restore the system to
the factory state. For details about restoring the system to the factory state, see “Creating and
using recovery media” on page 111.
If the problem persists, have the computer serviced.
• Problem: My screen goes blank while the computer is on.
Solution: Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do either of the following:
– Touch the TrackPoint or the touch pad, or press a key to exit the screen saver.
– Press the power switch to resume from sleep (standby) or hibernation.
Beep errors
Table 11. Beep errors
Problem
Solution
One short beep, pause, three short beeps, pause, three
more short beeps, and one short beep
Make sure that memory modules are installed correctly. If
they are, and you still hear the beeps, have the computer
serviced.
One long and two short beeps
The video function has a problem. Have the computer
serviced.
Four cycles of four short beeps
The Security Chip has a problem. Have the computer
serviced.
Five beeps
The system board has a problem. Have the computer
serviced.
232
User Guide
Memory problems
Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later.
If your memory is not operating properly, check the following items:
1. Verify that the memory is installed and seated correctly in your computer.
It may be necessary to remove all added memories to test the computer with only the factory-installed
memories, and then reinstall the memory one at a time to ensure a proper connection. For the
procedures to remove and reinstall a memory, refer to “Replacing memory” on page 135.
2. Check for error messages during startup.
Follow the appropriate corrective actions for Power-on self-test (POST) . See “Error messages” on
page 229.
3. Verify that the latest system BIOS (UEFI BIOS) for your model has been installed.
4. Verify the proper memory configuration and compatibility including the maximum memory size and the
memory speed.
For details, refer to the instructions in “Replacing memory” on page 135.
5. Run diagnostic programs. See “Diagnosing problems” on page 227.
Modem and networking
The following are the most common modem and networking problems:
Modem problems
• Problem: Your modem application does not work with the built-in modem.
Solution: Make sure that the internal modem port is enabled by opening the Device Manager and doing
as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
4. Double-click Modems.
5. Right-click the device, and click Enable.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance, and then click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab, and then click the Device Manager button.
4. Double-click Modems.
5. Right-click the device, and click Enable.
If the modem works correctly, set the following modem settings by doing the following:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Phone and Modem Options.
4. Click the Modems tab. The name of the modem installed in your computer is highlighted.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
233
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Change settings button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation,
type the password or provide confirmation.
7. Click the Modem tab.
8. Clear the Wait for dial tone before dialing check box.
9. Click the Advanced tab.
10. Click the Change Default Preferences button.
11. For Data Protocol, select Disabled.
12. For Compression, select Disabled.
13. Click OK to close the window.
14. Click OK to close the window.
15. Click the Dialing Rules tab.
16. Click the Edit button.
17. Type the required information in each text box, and then click either Tone or Pulse.
18. Click OK to close the window.
19. Click OK to close the window.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Control Panel ➙ Printers and Other Hardware.
3. Click Phone and Modem Options.
4. Click the Modems tab. The name of the modem installed in your computer is highlighted.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Modem tab.
7. Clear the Wait for dial tone before dialing check box.
8. Click the Advanced tab.
9. Click the Change Default Preferences button.
10. For Data Protocol, select Disabled.
11. For compression, select Disabled.
12. Click OK to close the window.
13. Click OK to close the window.
14. Click the Dialing Rules tab.
15. Click the Edit button.
16. Type the required information in each text box, and then click either Tone or Pulse.
17. Click OK to close the window.
18. Click OK to close the window.
Run your modem application again.
• Problem: The Modem on Hold (MoH) function does not work.
Solution: Use a telephone line that has the Call waiting function and the Caller ID function, which each
country or region sets independently.
Connect to an ISP access point that is compatible with the MoH function. Check with your ISP.
To use this function, start the MoH application before dialing.
234
User Guide
If the task tray has no icon for the MoH application, start the application as follows:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs ➙ NetWaiting ➙ NetWaiting.
If the icon for the application is on the task tray, make sure that the function is enabled as follows:
1. Right-click the MoH icon on the task tray.
2. Select Settings.
3. Make sure that the check box for Screen all incoming calls and prompt the user or Accept all
incoming calls is selected.
4. Click OK to close the window.
For further information, double-click the MoH icon on the task tray to open the Netwaiting window;
then click the ? mark.
The MoH function has been tested and shown to work in the United States and Canada. It may not work
correctly in other countries.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, click Show hidden icons in the task bar. The MoH
icon is displayed.
• Problem: Connecting to an ISP takes longer when the Fast Connect function is used. Or, the connection
speed is slow when the Fast Connect function is enabled.
Solution: The Fast Connect function remembers the telephone line condition of the previous call. It works
fine when you call the same telephone number from the same place. If you call the same telephone number
from a different place, however, it takes longer to connect to the line, or the connection speed is slow. To
avoid this problem, disable the function when you call the same telephone number from a different place.
Disable the function as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Phone and Modem Options.
4. Click the Modems tab. The name of the modem installed in your computer is highlighted.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Change settings button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation,
type the password or provide confirmation.
7. Select the Advanced tab.
8. Type +PQC=3 in the Extra initialization commands: field.
9. Click OK to close the window.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Control Panel ➙ Printers and Other Hardware.
3. Click Phone and Modem Options.
4. Click the Modems tab. The name of the modem installed in your computer is highlighted.
5. Click Properties.
6. Select the Advanced tab.
7. Type +PQC=3 in the Extra initialization commands: field.
8. Click OK to close the window.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
235
Ethernet problems
• Problem: Your computer cannot connect to the network.
Solution: Make sure that:
– The cable is installed properly.
The network cable must be securely connected both to the Ethernet connector of your computer and
to the RJ45 connector of the hub. The maximum allowable distance from the computer to hub is
100 meters. If the cable is connected and the distance is within acceptable limits but the problem
persists, try a different cable.
– You are using the correct device driver.
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type
the password or provide confirmation.
4. If the ! mark is to the left of the adapter name under Network adapters, you might not use the
correct driver or the driver is not enabled. To update the driver, right-click the highlighted adapter.
5. Click Update Driver Software, and then follow the instructions on the screen.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance, and then click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button.
4. If the x mark is to the left of the adapter name under Network adapter, you might not use the
correct driver or the driver is not enabled. To update the driver, right-click the highlighted adapter.
5. Click Properties. The Properties window appears.
6. Click the Driver tab.
7. Click the Update Driver button. The Update Device Driver wizard appears. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
– The switch port and the adapter have the same duplex setting.
If you configured the adapter for full duplex, make sure the switch port is also configured for full
duplex. Setting the wrong duplex mode can degrade performance, cause data loss, or result in lost
connections.
– You have installed all networking software that is necessary for your network environment.
Check with your LAN administrator for the necessary networking software.
• Problem: The adapter stops working for no apparent reason.
Solution: The network driver files may be corrupt or missing. Update the driver by referring to the
“Solution” description for the procedure to make sure that the correct device driver is installed in the
preceding problem.
• Problem: If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model and you use the a speed of 1000 Mbps, the
connection fails or errors occur.
Solution:
– Use Category 5 wiring and make sure that the network cable is securely connected.
– Connect to a 1000 BASE-T hub/switch (not 1000 BASE-X).
• Problem: The Wake on LAN (WOL) feature is not working.
236
User Guide
Solution:
– Make sure that WOL is enabled in ThinkPad Setup.
– If it is, check with your LAN administrator for the necessary settings.
• Problem: If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model, it cannot connect to the network at 1000 Mbps.
Instead, it connects at 100 Mbps.
Solution:
– Try another cable.
– Make sure that the link partner is set to auto-negotiate.
– Make sure that the switch is 802.3ab-compliant (gigabit over copper).
A wireless LAN problem
• Problem: You cannot connect using the built-in wireless networking card.
Solution: Make sure that your wireless LAN driver is the latest version installed. Check the Web site and
confirm the driver version supported by Access Connections is the latest documented in the README file.
Make sure that your computer is within range of a wireless access point.
Make sure that the wireless radio is enabled by double-clicking the Access Connections icon in the
task bar.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, click Show hidden icons in the task bar. The Access
Connections icon is displayed. For more information about the icon, see the Help in Access Connections.
Check Network Name (SSID), and your encryption information. Use Access Connections to verify this
case-sensitive information.
A wireless WAN problem
• Message: Unauthorized WAN card is plugged in - Power off and remove the WAN card.
Solution: The WAN card is not supported on this computer. Remove it.
Note: Depending on your computer, some models do not have a wireless WAN.
Bluetooth problems
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista
• Problem: Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset/headphone but comes from the local
speaker even though the headset/headphone is connected using Headset profile or AV profile.
Solution: Do the following:
1. Exit the application that uses the sound device (for example, Windows Media Player).
2. Open the Control Panel by clicking Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Click Hardware and Sound ➙ Sound.
4. Select the Playback tab.
5. If you are using Headset profile, select Bluetooth Hands-free Audio and click the Set Default
button. If you are using AV profile, select Stereo Audio and click the Set Default button.
6. Click OK to close the Sound window.
• Problem: PIM (Personal Information Manager) items sent from Windows 7 and Windows Vista cannot be
received correctly into the address book of any other Bluetooth-enabled device.
Solution: Windows 7 and Windows Vista send PIM items in XML format, but most Bluetooth-enabled
devices handle PIM items in vCard format. If another Bluetooth-enabled device can receive a file
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
237
through Bluetooth, a PIM item sent from Windows 7 and Windows Vista might be saved as a file with
the extension .contact.
For Windows XP
Notes: If you are using the Microsoft standard Bluetooth features and you want to access information about
how to use the Bluetooth function, do the following:
1. Press Fn+F5 to turn on Bluetooth.
2. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Click Printers and Other Hardware.
4. Click Bluetooth Devices.
5. Click the Options tab.
6. Click Learn more about Bluetooth Settings
Note: If you are using the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, refer to the following
instructions.
Note: Check your connection anytime and make sure that no other Bluetooth-enabled device is searching for
the device to which you want to connect. Simultaneous searching is not allowed in the Bluetooth connection.
• Problem: You search for a Bluetooth-enabled device by clicking View devices in range in My Bluetooth
Places, but you cannot find anything.
Solution: Make sure that the device to which you want to connect is enabled for the Bluetooth connection.
After making sure of the above, turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again, or restart your computer.
Then search for the device again.
Note: If you are using the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, refer to the following
instructions.
• Problem: You cannot connect to any Bluetooth-enabled device.
Solution: Make sure that both your computer and the device are turned on and their Bluetooth antennas
are enabled.
After making sure of the above, turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again, or restart your computer.
Then re-establish your connection to the device.
If the problem persists, re-install the Bluetooth software and reestablish your connection to the device.
• Problem: Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, but you cannot use any of the
services of that device.
Solution: Make sure that the device is enabled for the Bluetooth connection.
1. Double-click the My Bluetooth Places icon.
2. Go to Bluetooth Tasks and click View devices in range.
If you cannot find the device, it may have stopped responding. Make sure that it is enabled for the
Bluetooth connection. If you find it, connect to the services you want.
If you are sure that the device is responding, turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again, or restart
your computer. Then try to connect again.
• Problem: You cannot pull a business card from the connected computer.
Solution: Make sure that the connected computer has its own default business card application and that
the card is ready for communication.
Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to download the business card.
• Problem: You cannot send a business card to the connected computer.
238
User Guide
Solution: Make sure that your computer has its own default business card application and that the card
is ready for communication.
Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to upload your business card.
• Problem: Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth-enabled computer that works as an FTP server,
but you cannot see any files in the FTP server.
Solution: Check the newly shared files as follows:
1. In the menu of My Bluetooth Places, click View.
2. Click Update. The status is updated in the window, so that you can check the newly shared files.
Make sure that the shared folder in the connected computer contains the files you are looking for.
Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to connect and view the
files in the computer.
• Problem: Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth-enabled computer, but you cannot gain access
to the network.
Solution: Make sure that the Bluetooth-enabled computer is connected to a network.
Make sure that the connected computer has been set up to share its network connectivity and that the
security settings allow you to connect and establish the remote network access.
• Problem: Your computer cannot connect a Bluetooth-enabled computer that uses serial port applications.
Solution: Reestablish a connection with the Bluetooth-enabled computer, and try the serial connection
again.
• Problem: Bluetooth serial port was disconnected automatically.
Solution: When any serial-based connection is established, an inactivity timer starts. If no application
opens the port, the connection is ended automatically. This is a normal characteristic of the serial-based
connection and is not a defect. If you need the Bluetooth serial port, just reconnect it.
• Problem: PIM Synchronization failed with an error message “The Synchronization with xxx (Bluetooth
device name) failed. PIM (Personal Information Manager) Interface failed.”
Solution: Start a mail application, and set up your e-mail account. OR, modify the Bluetooth configuration
so as not to synchronize e-mail items, as follows:
1. Double-click My Bluetooth Places.
2. Click Bluetooth, and select Bluetooth Setup Wizard.
3. Select I want to configure the Bluetooth services that this computer will provide to remote
devices., and click Next.
4. Select PIM Synchronization, and click Configure.
5. Select Do Not Synchronize in the e-mail synchronization selection, and click OK.
6. Click Finish to close the Bluetooth Service Selection window.
• Problem: ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software does not function.
Solution: Do the following:
1. Turn on Bluetooth by pressing Fn+F5.
2. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Click the Performance and Maintenance icon.
4. Click the System icon.
5. Click the Hardware tab.
6. Click the Device Manager button. The Device Manager window opens.
7. Check whether the words “Bluetooth Device” appear in the device listing in the window.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
239
If the words “Bluetooth Radio” appear in the device listing, the Microsoft Bluetooth software is installed
on your computer. If you want to use ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, you have to
install it and then replace the Bluetooth driver. For more information, see “Using Bluetooth” on page 51.
• Problem: While looking at the Classic View of the Control Panel, you see two Bluetooth icons in the
Control Panel.
Solution: If you have installed the Microsoft Bluetooth software before, and you are using ThinkPad
Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, you may find two Bluetooth icons in the Control Panel. One
is the Bluetooth Configuration icon for ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software, and the
other is the Bluetooth Devices icon for the Microsoft Bluetooth software.
• Problem: Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset/headphone but comes from the local
speaker even though the headset/headphone is connected using Headset profile or AV profile.
Solution: Do the following:
1. Exit the application that uses the sound device (for example, Windows Media Player).
2. Open the Control Panel by clicking Start ➙ Control Panel.
3. Double-click Sounds and Audio Devices to open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window.
4. Select the Audio tab.
5. If you are using Headset profile, select Bluetooth Audio for both Sound playback and Sound
recording. If you are using AV profile, select Bluetooth High Quality Audio for both Sound playback
and Sound recording.
6. Click OK to close the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window.
Keyboard and other pointing devices
The following are the most common keyboard and other pointing devices problems:
UltraNav problems
• Problem: The pointer drifts when the computer is turned on or after it resumes normal operation.
Solution: The pointer might drift when you are not using the TrackPoint during normal operation. This
is a normal characteristic of the TrackPoint and is not a defect. Pointer drifting might occur for several
seconds under the following conditions:
– When the computer is turned on.
– When the computer resumes normal operation.
– When the TrackPoint is pressed for a long time.
– When the temperature changes.
Problem: The TrackPoint or touch pad does not work.
Solution: Make sure that the TrackPoint or touch pad is set to Enabled in the UltraNav Device Setting.
Note: To open the UltraNav Device Setting, press Fn+F8.
Keyboard problems
• Problem: All or some keys on the keyboard do not work.
Solution: If an external numeric keypad is connected:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Remove the external numeric keypad.
3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again.
240
User Guide
If the keyboard problem is resolved, carefully reconnect the external numeric keypad, external keyboard,
making sure that you have seated the connectors properly.
If the problem remains, make sure that the correct device driver is installed.
For Windows 7:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel. Change the view of the Control Panel from Category to Large icons
or Small icons.
2. Click Keyboard.
3. Select the Hardware tab. In the Device Properties, make sure that the Device Status is This device
is working properly.
For Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound, and then click Keyboard.
3. Select the Hardware tab. In the Device Properties, make sure that the Device Status is This device
is working properly.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, and then click Keyboard.
3. Select the Hardware tab. In the In the Device Properties, make sure that the Device Status is This
device is working properly.
If keys on the keyboard still do not work, have the computer serviced.
• Problem: A number appears when you type a letter.
Solution: The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Shift+ScrLk or Fn+NmLk.
• Problem: All or some keys on the external numeric keypad do not work.
Solution: Make sure that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer.
Display and multimedia devices
This section includes the most common display and multimedia devices problems which are computer
screen, external monitor, audio, and optical drive. Check these topics to learn more information.
Computer screen problems
• Problem: The screen is blank.
Solution: Do the following:
– Press Fn+F7 to bring up the image.
Note: If you use the Fn+F7 key combination to apply a presentation scheme, press Fn+F7 at least
three times in three seconds, and the image is displayed on the computer screen.
– If you are using the ac power adapter, or using the battery and the battery status indicator is on (is
green), press Fn+Home to make the screen brighter.
– If the sleep (standby) status indicator is on (is green), press Fn to resume from the sleep (standby) mode.
– If the problem persists, do the Solution in the problem below.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, it does not support the presentation scheme.
• Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
241
Solution: Make sure that:
– The display device driver is installed correctly.
– The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
– The monitor type is correct.
To check these settings, do as follows:
For Windows 7:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display at the left.
3. Select Change display settings. Check whether the screen resolution is correctly set.
4. Click Advanced Settings.
5. Click the Adapter tab.
6. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
7. Click the Properties button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type
the password or provide confirmation. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is
working properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button. Close the Properties window.
8. Click the Monitor tab. Check whether the color quality is correctly set, make sure other information
is also correct.
9. Click the Properties button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type
the password or provide confirmation. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is
working properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button.
For Windows Vista:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
2. Click Display Settings and check whether the screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
3. Click Advanced Settings.
4. Click the Adapter tab.
5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
6. Click the Properties button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type
the password or provide confirmation. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is
working properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button.
7. Click the Monitor tab.
8. Make sure the information is correct.
9. Click the Properties button. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type
the password or provide confirmation. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is
working properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button.
For Windows XP:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Check whether the screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
4. Click Advanced.
5. Click the Adapter tab.
242
User Guide
6. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
7. Click the Properties button. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is working
properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button.
8. Click the Monitor tab.
9. Make sure the information is correct.
10. Click the Properties button. Check the “Device status” box and make sure the device is working
properly. If not, click the Troubleshoot button.
• Problem: Incorrect characters appear on the screen.
Solution: Did you install the operating system or application program correctly? If they are installed and
configured correctly, have the computer serviced.
• Problem: The screen stays on even after you turn off your computer.
Solution: Press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or over to turn off your computer; then turn
it on again.
• Problem: Missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time you turn on your computer.
Solution: This is an intrinsic characteristic of the TFT technology. Your computer's display contains
multiple thin-film transistors (TFTs). A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen
might exist all the time.
External monitor problems
• Problem: The external monitor is blank.
Solution: To bring up the image, press Fn+F7 and select the desired monitor. If the problem persists,
do the following:
1. Connect the external monitor to another computer to make sure it works.
2. Reconnect the external monitor to your computer.
3. Refer to the manual shipped with the external monitor to check the resolutions and refresh rates that
are supported.
– If the external monitor supports the same resolution as the computer display or a higher resolution,
view output on the external monitor or on both the external monitor and the computer display.
– If the external monitor supports a lower resolution than the computer display, view output on the
external monitor only. (If you view output on the both the computer display and the external
monitor, the external monitor screen will be blank or distorted.)
• Problem: You cannot set a higher resolution than the present one on your external monitor.
Solution:
– Make sure that monitor information is correct. Do the following:
For Windows 7:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button.
2. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor).
3. Click Advanced Settings.
4. Click the Adapter tab.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
243
5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
6. Click OK.
If the information is incorrect, reinstall the device driver. See below for more information.
For Windows Vista:
1. Right-click on the desktop and click Personalize.
2. Click Display Settings.
3. Click the Advanced Settings button.
4. Click the Adapter tab.
5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
6. Click OK.
If the information is incorrect, reinstall the device driver. See below for more information.
For Windows XP:
1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Click Advanced.
4. Click the Adapter tab.
5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window.
Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer.
6. Click OK.
If the information is incorrect, reinstall the device driver. See below for more information.
– Check the monitor type and, if necessary, update the driver by doing the following:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an
electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button.
4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor).
5. Click Advanced Settings.
6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type
is correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
7. If more than one monitor type is displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP
Monitor.
8. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
9. Click the Driver tab.
10. Click Update Driver.
11. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of
device drivers on my computer.
244
User Guide
12. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
13. Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor.
14. After updating the driver, click Close.
15. Set Resolution.
Note: To change the color settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors.
16. Click OK.
For Windows Vista:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an
electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
Note: After pressing Fn+F7, you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
5. Click Display Settings.
6. Click the Advanced Settings button.
7. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type
is correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
8. If more than one monitor type is displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP
Monitor.
9. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
10. Click the Driver tab.
11. Click Update Driver.
12. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of
device drivers on my computer.
13. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
14. Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor.
15. After updating the driver, click Close.
16. Set Resolution and Colors in the Display Settings window.
17. Click OK.
For Windows XP:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an
electrical outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
Note: After pressing Fn+F7, you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
5. Click the Settings tab.
6. Click Advanced.
7. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type
is correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do as follows.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
245
8. If more than one monitor type is displayed, select Default Monitor.
9. Click Properties.
10. Click the Driver tab.
11. Click Update Driver. The Hardware Update Wizard appears.
12. Click No, not this time, and then click Next.
13. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
14. Select Don't search. I will choose the driver to install, and then click Next.
15. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box.
16. Select Manufacturers and Models for your monitor.
17. After updating the driver, click OK to close the Properties window.
18. Set Colors and Screen area in the Display Properties window.
19. Click OK.
• Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted.
Solution: Make sure that the monitor information is correct. (Refer to the “Solution” for setting a higher
resolution on the external monitor.)
Make sure that the appropriate monitor type is selected. (Refer to the “Solution” for setting a higher
resolution on the external monitor.)
Make sure that an appropriate refresh rate is selected by doing the following:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button.
4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor).
5. Click Advanced Settings.
6. Click the Monitor tab.
7. Select the correct screen refresh rate.
For Windows Vista:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
Note: After pressing Fn+F7, you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
5. Click Display Settings.
6. Click the Advanced Settings button.
7. Click the Monitor tab.
8. Select the correct screen refresh rate.
For Windows XP:
246
User Guide
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Press Fn+F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor.
Note: After pressing Fn+F7, you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears.
4. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
5. Click the Settings tab.
6. Click Advanced.
7. Click the Monitor tab.
8. Select the correct refresh rate.
• Problem: Wrong characters appear on the screen.
Solution: Did you follow the correct procedure in installing the operating system or application program?
If you did, have the external monitor serviced.
• Problem: The Extend desktop function does not work.
Solution: Enable the Extend desktop function by doing the following:
For Windows 7:
1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical
outlet.
2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer.
3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution.
4. Click the Monitor-2 icon.
5. Select Extend these displays for Multiple displays.
6. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
7. Select the Resolution of the primary display.
8. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the external monitor).
9. Select the Resolution of the secondary display.
10. Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon. You can set the monitors in any
relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
11. Click OK to apply the changes.
Note: To change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click
Advanced Settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors.
For Windows Vista:
1. Attach the computer to an external monitor.
2. Right-click on the desktop, and click Personalize.
3. Click Display Settings.
4. Click the Monitor-2 icon.
5. Select the Extend the desktop onto this monitor check box.
6. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
7. Select the Resolution and Colors of the primary display.
8. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the external monitor).
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
247
9. Select the Resolution and Colors of the secondary display.
10. Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon. You can set the monitors in any
relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
11. Click OK to apply the changes.
For Windows XP:
1. Attach the computer to an external monitor.
2. Right-click on the desktop, and click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
3. Click the Settings tab.
4. Click the Monitor-2 icon.
5. Select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box.
6. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display).
7. Select the screen resolution and color quality of the primary display.
8. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the external monitor).
9. Select the screen resolution and color quality of the secondary display.
10. Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon. You can set the monitors in any
relative position, but the icons must touch each other.
11. Click OK to apply the changes.
• Problem: Display switching does not work.
Solution: If you use the Extend desktop function, disable it, and change the display output location. If
a DVD movie or a video clip is playing, stop the playback, close the application, and then change the
display output location.
• Problem: If you use the Extend desktop function, you cannot set a higher resolution or higher refresh
rate on the secondary display.
Solution: Change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display by doing
the following:
For Windows 7: Change the resolution depth to lower settings for the primary display. Refer to the
“Solution” for “The Extend desktop function does not work” above.
For Windows Vista: Using the Display Settings window, change the resolution and the color depth to
lower settings for the primary display. To launch the Display Settings window, refer to the “Solution” for
“The Extend desktop function does not work” above.
For Windows XP: Using the Display Properties window, change the resolution and the color depth to lower
settings for the primary display. To launch the Display Properties window, refer to the “Solution” for “The
Extend desktop function does not work” above.
• Problem: The screen position on the external monitor is incorrect when that monitor is set for a high
resolution.
Solution: Sometimes, when you use a high resolution such as 1600x1200, the image is shifted to left
or right on the screen. To correct this, first make sure that your external monitor supports the display
mode, that is, the resolution and the refresh rate, that you have set. If it does not, set a display mode that
the monitor supports. If it does support the display mode you have set, go to the setup menu for the
monitor itself and adjust the settings there. Usually the external monitor has buttons for access to the
setup menu. For details, see the reference manual for the monitor.
Audio problems
• Problem: Wave or MIDI sound does not play correctly.
248
User Guide
Solution: Make sure the built-in audio device is configured correctly.
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
4. Double-click Sound, video and game controllers (in Windows Vista, click the + mark for Sound,
video and game controllers).
5. Make sure the following device is enabled and configured correctly:
– Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance
3. Click System.
4. Click the Hardware tab, and then click the Device Manager button.
5. Click the + mark for Sound, video and game controllers.
6. Make sure the following device is enabled and configured correctly:
– Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD
• Problem: Recordings made by using the Microphone input are not loud enough.
Solution: Make sure that Microphone Boost is turned on and set as follows:
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Sound.
4. Click the Recording tab in the Sound window.
5. Select Microphone, and click the Properties button.
6. Click the Levels tab, and move the Microphone Boost slider upwards.
7. Click OK.
For Windows XP:
1. Double-click the volume icon in the task bar. The Volume Control window opens.
2. Click Options.
3. Click Properties.
4. Select Conexant HD Audio input in the Mixer device list.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Options, and then click Advanced Controls.
7. Find the Microphone volume control, and then click Advanced.
8. Select the Microphone boost check box.
9. Click Close.
Note: For details about controlling volume, refer to your Windows online help.
• Problem: A volume or balance slider cannot be moved.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
249
Solution: The slider might be grayed out. This means that its position is fixed by the hardware and
cannot be changed.
• Problem: The volume sliders do not stay in place when some audio applications are used.
Solution: It is normal for the sliders to change position when certain sound applications are used. The
applications are aware of the Volume Mixer window (in Windows XP, Volume Control window) and are
allowed to change the settings themselves. An example is the Windows Media Player. Usually the
application has sliders available to control the sound from within the application.
• Problem: The volume sliders do not all fit in the Volume Control window in Windows XP.
Solution: Press Ctrl+S keys while the volume control is in focus, and toggle to a smaller size.
• Problem: The balance slider cannot completely mute one channel.
Solution: The control is designed to compensate for minor differences in balance and does not
completely mute either channel.
• Problem: There is no volume control for MIDI sound on the Volume Mixer window (in Windows XP,
Volume Control window).
Solution: Use the hardware volume control. In Windows XP, use the hardware volume control or the
Wave volume control on the Volume Control window. This is because the Built-In Synthesizer Software
does not support the control.
• Problem: The sound cannot be turned off completely even if you set the Master volume control at
minimum.
Solution: You can still hear some sound even though you have set the Master volume control at minimum.
To turn off the sound completely, go to the Master volume control and select Mute speakers (in Windows
Vista and Windows XP, Mute).
• Problem: Sound does not come from a headphone or a speaker, or your computer cannot record sounds
when the SmartAudio is set to MULTI-STREAM mode (Windows Vista).
Solution: To switch from one device to another (for example, from a speaker to a headphone, or from an
external microphone to a built-in microphone), do as follows:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ Hardware and Sound.
2. Click the SmartAudio icon. The SmartAudio window opens.
3. Make sure that you are in MULTI-STREAM mode in the Audio Director window.
4. In the Volume Mixer window, select the device you want-for example, speakers. If your computer
is attached to a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus or a ThinkPad Mini Dock, you can also select a device
from them.
5. Play any sound via a music program (for example, Windows Media Player). Make sure that sound
comes from speakers now.
6. Then, if you would like to switch to a headphone, close the music program.
7. Go to the Volume Mixer window. Then select another device, which is now the headphone.
8. Play any sound via the music program. Make sure that sound comes from a headphone attached
directly to the system.
For details, refer to the Help for SmartAudio.
Note: In the Volume Mixer window of SmartAudio, a check mark by the entry for a device, such as
speakers for a playback device, or a built-in microphone for a recording device, shows that the device
has been selected.
250
User Guide
• Problem: When you connect a headphone to your computer while playing sound, a speaker does not
produce sound in the MULTI-STREAM mode at SmartAudio (Windows 7).
Solution: Once the headphone is attached, the streaming is automatically redirected to it. If you want
to listen to sound from the speakers again, be sure to set those speakers as the default device. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel ➙ All Control Panel Items.
2. Click the SmartAudio icon. The SmartAudio window opens.
3. Look at the playback devices. If you have attached a headphone, the headphone will be automatically
set as the default device, and the icon for that headphone will be checked.
4. To set a different device as the default, just double-click the icon for those speakers. That icon
will now have a check mark.
5. Play any sound by use of a music program such as Windows Media Player. Make sure that sound
comes from the speakers.
For details, refer to the Help for SmartAudio.
Fingerprint reader problems
• Problem: The surface of the reader is dirty, stained, or wet.
Solution: Gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.
• Problem: The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint.
Solution: If the surface of the reader is dirty, stained, or wet, gently clean the surface of the reader
with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.
If your finger has any of the following conditions, you may not be able to register or authenticate it:
– Your finger is wrinkled.
– Your finger is rough, dry, or injured.
– Your finger is very dry.
– Your finger is stained with dirt, mud, or oil.
– The surface of your finger is very different from when you enrolled your fingerprint.
– Your finger is wet.
– A finger is used that has not been enrolled.
To improve the situation, try the following:
– Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers.
– Enroll and use a different finger for authentication.
– If your hands are too dry, apply lotion to them.
Battery and power
This section tells what to do if you have a battery and power problem.
This section includes five topics: Battery, ac power adapter, Power, Power button, Startup and Sleep
(standby) and hibernation. Check these topics to find the related information.
Battery problems
• Problem: The battery pack cannot be fully charged by the power-off method in the standard charge
time for your computer.
Solution: The battery pack might be over-discharged. Do the following:
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
251
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Make sure that the over-discharged battery pack is in the computer.
3. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and let it charge.
If the optional Quick Charger is available, use it to charge the over-discharged battery pack.
If the battery pack cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use a new battery pack.
• Problem: Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty, -or- Your
computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty.
Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery pack.
• Problem: The operating time for a fully charged battery pack is short.
Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery pack. If your battery's operating time is still short, use a
new battery pack.
• Problem: The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery pack.
Solution: The surge protector in the battery pack might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to
reset the protector; then turn on the computer again.
• Problem: The battery pack cannot be charged.
Solution: You cannot charge the battery when it is too hot. If the battery feels hot, remove it from the
computer and allow it to cool to room temperature. After it cools, reinstall it and recharge the battery. If it
still cannot be charged, have it serviced.
AC power adapter problems
• Problem: The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the working electrical outlet, but the
power adapter (power plug) icon is not displayed in the task bar. Also the ac power indicator does
not light up.
Solution: Do as follows:
1. Make sure that the connection of the ac power adapter is correct. For connecting the ac power
adapter, see the Setup Instructions manual included in the shipping contents of your computer.
2. If the above step is correct, turn off the computer, then disconnect the ac power adapter and uninstall
the main battery.
3. Reinstall the battery and reconnect the ac power adapter, then turn on the computer.
4. If the power adapter icon still does not appear on the task bar and the ac power indicator does not
light up, have the ac power adapter and your computer serviced.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, to display the power adapter (power plug) icon, click
Show hidden icons in the task bar.
Power problems
Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later.
If your computer is getting no power at all, check the following items:
1. Verify the power switch. Refer to “System-status indicators” on page 14. The power switch is
illuminated whenever the computer is on.
2. Check all power connections. Remove any power strips and surge protectors to connect the ac power
adapter directly to the ac power outlet.
3. Inspect the ac power adapter. Check for any physical damage, and make sure that the power cable is
firmly attached to the adapter brick and the computer.
252
User Guide
4. Verify the ac power source is working by attaching another device to the outlet.
5. Remove the computer from a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W). Refer to “Detaching a ThinkPad
Port Replicator Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, or ThinkPad
Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W)” on page 188.
6. Remove all devices and then test for system power with minimal devices attached.
a. Disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer.
b. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over.
c. Remove the battery. Refer to “Replacing the battery” on page 119.
d. Remove the memory (SO-DIMM). Refer to “Replacing memory” on page 135.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled
and do not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs. For details, refer to the instructions in
“Increasing or replacing memory (W520)” on page 139.
e. Remove the PCI Express Mini Card. Refer to “Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for
wireless LAN/WiMAX connection” on page 151.
f. Remove the Ultrabay devices. Refer to “Replacing the device” on page 170.
g. Remove the hard disk drive and solid state drive. Refer to “Replacing the hard disk drive” on page
126 and “Replacing the solid state drive” on page 166.
h. Wait for 30 seconds, and then reinstall the SO-DIMM and the known good battery or the ac power
adapter to test the computer with minimal devices attached first.
Note: If your computer is a dual-core processor model, two Dummy DIMM cards are preinstalled
and do not replace the Dummy DIMM cards with SO-DIMMs. For details, refer to the instructions in
“Increasing or replacing memory (W520)” on page 139.
i.
Reinstall each device one at a time that you have removed in the earlier steps.
If your computer does not run on battery power, check the following items:
1. Remove and reseat the battery to make sure that it is properly connected. Refer to “Replacing the
battery” on page 119.
2. Swap batteries with another similar model, if available.
If another similar ThinkPad model is available, then verify that the battery pack works in the other
computer and that the battery pack for the other model works in this computer.
3. Verify the battery-status indicator. Refer to “Power-status indicators” on page 15.
The battery-status indicator is normally illuminated whenever the battery is installed and the computer is
on, or the ac power adapter is connected and the battery is charging. This indicator may be blinking or
solid in either orange or green color depending on the status of the battery.
A power button problem
• Problem: The system does not respond, and you cannot turn off the computer.
Solution: Turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the
system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery.
Startup problems
Print these instructions now and keep them with your computer for reference later.
If you receive an error message before the operating system loads, check the following item:
• Follow the appropriate corrective actions for Power-on self-test. See “Error messages” on page 229.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
253
If you receive an error message while the operating system is loading the desktop configuration after the
POST is completed, check the following items:
1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at http://support.lenovo.com and search for the error message.
2. Go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/ and search for the
error message.
Sleep (standby) and hibernation problems
• Problem: The computer enters sleep (standby) mode unexpectedly.
Solution: If the processor overheats, the computer automatically enter sleep (standby) mode to allow
the computer to cool and to protect the processor and other internal components. Check the settings
for sleep (standby) mode, using Power Manager.
• Problem: The computer enters sleep (standby) mode (the sleep/standby indicator turns on) immediately
after Power-on self-test.
Solution: Make sure that:
– The battery is charged.
– The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. Refer to “Features” on page 20,
“Specifications” on page 21, and “Operating environment” on page 22.
If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced.
• Problem: The “critical low-battery error” message appears, and the computer immediately turns off.
Solution: The battery power is getting low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and plug it
into an electrical outlet, or replace the battery with a charged one.
• Problem: The computer display remains blank after you press Fn to return from sleep (standby) mode.
Solution: Check whether an external monitor was disconnected or turned off while the computer was
in sleep (standby) mode. If you disconnected or turned off the external monitor, connect it or turn it on
before resuming the computer from the sleep (standby) mode. When resuming the computer from the
sleep (standby) mode without attaching the external monitor or turning it on, and the computer display
remains blank, press Fn+F7 to bring up the computer display.
Note: If you are using Fn+F7 to apply a presentation scheme, you will need to press Fn+F7 at least three
times in three seconds to bring up the computer display.
Note: If your computer is a Windows 7 model, it does not support the presentation scheme.
• Problem: The computer does not return from sleep (standby) mode, or the sleep (standby) indicator stays
on and the computer does not work.
Solution: If the system does not return from sleep (standby) mode, it may have entered sleep (standby) or
hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the sleep (standby) indicator.
– If the sleep (standby) indicator is on, your computer is in sleep (standby) mode. Connect the ac
power adapter to the computer; then press Fn.
– If the sleep (standby) indicator is off, your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state. Connect
the ac power adapter to the computer; then press the power button to resume operation.
If the system still does not return from sleep (standby) mode, your system may stop responding and you
may not be able to turn off the computer. In this case, you need to reset the computer. If you have not
saved your data, it may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or
more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery.
• Problem: Your computer does not enter sleep (standby) or hibernation mode.
254
User Guide
Solution: Check whether any option has been selected to disable your computer from entering sleep
(standby) or hibernation mode.
If your computer tries to enter sleep (standby) mode but the request is rejected, the device in the USB
connector might be disabled. If this occurs, do a hot-unplug-and-plug operation for the USB device.
• Problem: The Fn+F12 key combination does not make the computer enter hibernation mode.
Solution: The computer cannot enter hibernation mode:
– If the hibernation mode is not enabled in Windows XP. To enable it, do as follows:
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance.
3. Click Power Options.
4. Click the Hibernate tab.
5. Click the Enable hibernation check box.
6. Click OK.
If you want to be able to enter hibernation mode by pressing Fn+F12, you need to install ThinkPad
PM driver.
• Problem: The battery discharges slightly while the computer is in hibernation mode.
Solution: If the wakeup function is enabled, the computer consumes small amount of power. This is not
a defect. For details, refer to “Power-saving modes” on page 45.
Drives and other storage devices
This section includes three drive problems which are hard disk drive, solid state drive, and optical drive.
Hard disk drive problems
• Problem: The hard disk drive makes a rattling noise intermittently.
Solution: The rattling noise might be heard:
– When the hard disk drive begins or finishes getting access to data.
– When you carry the hard disk drive.
– When you carry your computer.
This is a normal characteristic of a hard disk drive and is not a defect.
• Problem: The hard disk drive does not work.
Solution: In the startup menu of ThinkPad Setup, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the
“Boot priority order” list. If it is included in the “Excluded from boot order” list, it is disabled. Select the
entry for it in the list and press the Shift+1 key. This moves the entry to the “Boot priority order” list.
• Problem: After setting a hard disk password on the hard disk drive of the computer, you moved the drive
to another computer. Now you cannot unlock the hard disk password.
Solution: Your computer supports an enhanced password algorithm. Computers older than yours may
not support such a security function.
Solid state drive problems
• Problem: When you compress files or folders by use of the data compression function in Windows, and
then decompress them, the process of writing to or reading from the files or folders is slow.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
255
Solution: Apply the disk defragmentation tool in Windows for faster access to the data.
Optical drive problems
• Problem: The optical drive, such as a CD, DVD, or CD-RW drive, does not work.
Solution: Make sure that the computer is turned on and a CD, DVD, or CD-RW is properly loaded on the
center pivot of the drive. (You should hear a click.)
Make sure that the drive connector is firmly connected to the computer. If you use an option that has a bay
for installing the drive, make sure that the option is firmly connected to the computer and works properly.
Make sure that the drive tray is firmly closed.
Make sure that the device drivers are correctly installed.
• Problem: You hear a noise from the drive when the CD, DVD, or CD-RW is spinning.
Solution: If the disc is not properly loaded on the center pivot of the drive, it may rub against the drive
cover and make a noise. Make sure that the disc is loaded properly in the drive.
• Problem: The tray does not open even if you press the eject button.
Solution: When your computer is not turned on, pressing the eject button does not cause the drive tray
to open. Make sure that the computer is turned on and that the drive connector is firmly connected
to the computer.
If the tray still does not open, make sure that the computer is running, and insert the end of a straightened
paper clip into the emergency eject hole. The tray will open.
• Problem: An optical medium, such as a CD, a DVD, or a CD-RW, cannot be read.
Solution: Make sure that the CD, DVD, or CD-RW is not dirty. If it is, clean it with a cleaner kit.
Test another CD, DVD, or CD-RW. If the computer can read the other CD, DVD, or CD-RW, the first
CD, DVD, or CD-RW might be defective
Make sure that the CD, DVD, or CD-RW is loaded on the center pivot of the drive with the label side
up. (You should hear a click.)
Make sure that the CD, DVD, or CD-RW is in one of the following formats:
– Music CD
– CD-ROM or CD-ROM XA
– Multisession photo CD
– Video CD
– DVD-ROM (DVD-video)
• Problem: When you try to write to a DVD-RAM disc that has been loaded into a DVD-RAM/CD-RW
combination drive on your computer, the following error message may be displayed: “The disc in the
drive is not a writable CD or it is full. Please insert a blank, writable CD into drive D:\, or insert a disc with
enough free space to hold all the files you have selected for writing to CD.” in Windows XP.
Solution: Before you write to a DVD-RAM disc, enable the writing function as follows:
1. Click Start ➙ My Computer.
2. Right-click DVD-RAM drive. A menu for the drive is displayed. The DVD-RAM drive is displayed in
the Devices with Removable Storage category.
3. Click Properties.
4. Click the Recording tab.
5. Clear the check box for Enable CD recording on this drive.
256
User Guide
6. Click OK.
You can get detailed information from the More Information section of the Microsoft Knowledge Base
826510. Visit the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/, type the
number of the knowledge base article you need in the search field, and click the Search button.
• Problem: When you try to write to a DVD-RW disc that has been loaded into a DVD-RAM/CD-RW
combination drive on your computer, you cannot write to it, and the following error message may be
displayed: “The disc in the drive is not a writable CD or it is full. Please insert a blank, writable CD into
drive D:\, or insert a disc with enough free space to hold all the files you have selected for writing to
CD.” in Windows XP.
Solution: To write to a DVD-RW disc, use a preinstalled software application such as Record Now on your
computer. You cannot write to the disc with only a Windows operating system, because the operating
system does not have the function to enable writing to the disc.
• Problem: The computer cannot play a CD, or the sound quality is not good.
Solution: Be sure that the disk meets the standards for your country. Usually, a disk that meets the local
standards is marked with a CD logo on the label. If you use a disc that does not meet these standards, we
cannot guarantee that it will play, or that, if it does play, the sound quality will be good.
• Problem: WinDVD8 has an HD DVD tab, but I cannot use it.
Solution: Your computer does not support an HD DVD drive.
• Problem: Other problems in Windows XP.
Solution: For information on the application for running a DVD-ROM, refer to the InterVideo WinDVD Help
Guidelines. To open the guidelines, click Start and move the pointer to All Programs and InterVideo
WinDVD; then click InterVideo WinDVD. You can click the ? on the InterVideo WinDVD window.
Software problems
• Problem: An application does not run correctly.
Solution: Make sure that the problem is not being caused by the application.
Check that your computer has the minimum required memory to run the application. Refer to the manuals
supplied with the application.
Check the following:
– The application is designed to operate with your operating system.
– Other applications run correctly on your computer.
– The necessary device drivers are installed.
– The application works when it is run on some other computer.
If an error message appears while you are using the application program, refer to the manuals supplied
with the application.
If the application still does not run correctly, contact your place of purchase or a service representative for
help.
Ports and connectors
This section includes the most common ports and connectors problems: Universal Serial Bus, and docking
station or port replication.
Universal Serial Bus problems
• Problem: A device connected to the USB connector does not work.
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting computer problems
257
Solution: Open the Device Manager window. Make sure that the USB device setup is correct, and that
the assignment of computer resource and the installation of the device driver are correct.
For Windows 7 and Windows Vista:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Hardware and Sound.
3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
For Windows XP:
1. Click Start ➙ Control Panel.
2. Click Performance and Maintenance, and click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button.
Refer to “Diagnosing problems” on page 227 and run a diagnostic test of the USB connector.
A docking station or port replicator problem
• Problem: The computer does not start when you try to turn it on, and does not respond when you try
to resume operation.
Solution: Make sure that:
– The ac power adapter is connected to the docking station or the port replicator.
– The docking indicator of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3, the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3, or the
ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 (170 W) is on.
– The computer is securely attached to the docking station or the port replicator.
258
User Guide
Chapter 11. Getting support
There is more to owning a ThinkPad notebook than having a powerful, portable computer. This chapter
offers information about when to communicate with Lenovo and how best to do it.
•
“Before you contact Lenovo” on page 259
•
“Getting help and service” on page 260
•
“Purchasing additional services” on page 261
Before you contact Lenovo
Often, you can solve your computer problems by referring to the information in the explanations of error
codes, running diagnostic programs or by consulting the ThinkPad Web site.
Register your computer
Register your ThinkPad products with Lenovo. Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/register. This can help
authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen. Registering your computer also enables Lenovo
to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades.
For more information about registering your computer, refer to “Register your computer” on page 29.
Download system updates
Downloading updated software might resolve problems you experience with your computer.
To download updated software, go to this Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers, and follow
the instructions on the screen.
Record information
Before you talk to a Lenovo representative, record the following important information about your computer.
Record problem symptoms and details
Collect the answers to the questions below before you call for help. Then, you will be able to get help
as quickly as possible.
• What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?
• Is there an error message that appears? What is the error code, if any?
• What operating system are you using? Which version?
• Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?
• Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?
Record system information
The serial number label is on the bottom of your computer. Record the machine type and the serial number.
• What is the name of your Lenovo product?
• What is the machine type?
• What is the serial number?
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
259
Getting help and service
If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about Lenovo products, you
will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information
about where to go for additional information about Lenovo and our products, what to do if you experience a
problem with your computer, and whom to call for service should it be necessary.
Information about your computer and preinstalled software, if any, is available in the documentation that
comes with your computer. That documentation includes printed books, online books, README files, and
help files. In addition, information about Lenovo products is available on the World Wide Web.
Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates. They are available via
Web download (connection charges may apply) or via disc. For more specific information and links, please
go to http://www.microsoft.com. Lenovo offers Up and Running technical assistance with installation of, or
questions related to, Service Packs for your Lenovo-preloaded Microsoft Windows product. For information,
please contact the Customer Support Center.
Using diagnostic programs
Many computer problems can be solved without outside assistance. If you experience a problem with your
computer, the first place to start is the troubleshooting information of your computer documentation. If you
suspect a software problem, see the documentation, including README files and online help, that comes
with the operating system or application program.
ThinkPad notebooks come with a set of diagnostic programs that you can use to help you identify hardware
problems. See “Diagnosing problems” on page 227 for instructions on using the diagnostic programs.
The troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or
updated device drivers or other software. Lenovo maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can
get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
Lenovo Support Web site
Technical support information is available on the Lenovo Support Web site at:
http://support.lenovo.com
This Web site is updated with the latest support information such as the following:
• Drivers and software
• Diagnostic solutions
• Product and service warranty
• Product and parts details
• User guides and manuals
• Knowledge base and frequently asked questions
Calling Lenovo
If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, during the warranty period, you can
get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support Center. The following services are
available during the warranty period:
• Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a
hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem.
260
User Guide
• Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty,
trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service.
• Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product
has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes
(ECs) available that apply to your hardware.
The following items are not covered:
• Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts
•
•
•
•
•
Note: All warranted parts contain a 7-character identification in the format FRU XXXXXXX.
Identification of software problem sources
Configuration of system BIOS (UEFI BIOS) as part of an installation or upgrade
Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers
Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)
Installation and maintenance of application programs
For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that applies to your Lenovo hardware product,
see “Warranty Information” in the Safety and Warranty Guide comes with your computer.
If possible, be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative
needs to help you resolve a computer problem. Please ensure that you have downloaded the most current
drivers and system updates, run diagnostics, and recorded information before you call. When calling for
technical assistance, please have the following information available:
• Machine Type and Model
• Serial numbers of your computer, monitor, and other components, or your proof of purchase
• Description of the problem
• Exact wording of any error messages
• Hardware and software configuration information for your system
Telephone numbers
For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to
http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone or refer to the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your
computer.
Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. The latest phone numbers are available at
http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact
your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative.
Purchasing additional services
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as support for Lenovo
and non-Lenovo hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup and configuration;
upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom installations. Service availability and service
name might vary by country.
For more information about these services, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html
Chapter 11. Getting support
261
262
User Guide
Appendix A. Regulatory information
Wireless related information
Wireless interoperability
Wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that
is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:
• The 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g or 802.1 in draft 2.0 on Wireless LANs, as defined and approved by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
• The Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Bluetooth device is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth product that is compliant to Bluetooth
Specification 2.1+EDR as defined by the Bluetooth SIG. Following profiles are supported by Bluetooth device:
• Generic Access
• Service Discovery
• Serial Port
• Dial-up Networking
• FAX
• LAN Access using PPP
• Personal Area Network
• Generic Object Exchange
• Generic Object Push
• File Transfer
• Synchronization
• Audio Gateway
• Headset
• Printer
• Human Interface Devices (Keyboard/Mouse)
• Basic Image
• Handsfree
• AV
• Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) (Windows 7 and Windows Vista only)
• VDP-Sync Profile (Windows 7 and Windows Vista only)
Usage environment and your health
Integrated wireless cards emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the
level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like
for example mobile phones.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
263
Due to the fact that integrated wireless cards operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes they are safe for use by consumers. These standards and
recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels
and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature.
In some situation or environment, the use of integrated wireless cards may be restricted by the proprietor
of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations and areas may for
example include:
• Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting
areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, e.g.
pace makers.
• In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or
identified as harmful.
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (e.g.,
airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use integrated wireless cards prior to
turning on the computer.
Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas
ThinkPad models feature an integrated diversity antenna system built into the display for optimal reception,
enabling wireless communication wherever you are.
264
User Guide
1. Wireless LAN and WiMAX combo antenna (Auxiliary)
The auxiliary antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located on the upper left
side of the computer display, near the center.
2. Wireless LAN and WiMAX combo antenna (Main), wireless LAN antenna (Third)
The main antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located on the upper right side of
the computer display, near the center. If your computer has the Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO)
wireless LAN feature, the third wireless antenna is also located here.
3. Wireless WAN antenna (Main)
If your computer comes with a wireless WAN feature, its transmitter antenna is located at the top
right corner of the computer display.
Locating wireless regulatory notices
For more information about the wireless regulatory notices, refer to the ThinkPad Regulatory Notice shipped
with your computer.
If your computer is shipped without the Regulatory Notice, go to the Lenovo Web site at
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadUserGuides. Then follow the instructions on the screen to find the
Regulatory Notice.
Export classification notice
This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export
Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 4A994.b. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed
countries in the EAR E1 country list.
Electronic emission notices
The following information refers to ThinkPad 4239, 4240, 4241, 4242, 4243, 4244, 4246, 4249, 4260, 4270,
4276, 4281, 4282, and 4284.
Appendix A. Regulatory information
265
Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help.
Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than specified or
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
Phone Number: 919-294-5900
Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot
accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology
Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived
for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication devices.
266
User Guide
German Class B compliance statement
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) zur
Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten
und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden.
Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt
ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln“
EMVG (früher „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten“). Dies ist die Umsetzung der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Geräten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für
Geräte der Klasse B.
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen
- CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B.
Korea Class B compliance statement
Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement
Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power
mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase
Appendix A. Regulatory information
267
Lenovo product service information for Taiwan
268
User Guide
Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements
Lenovo encourages owners of information technology equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment
when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in
recycling their IT products. Information on product recycling offerings can be found on Lenovo's Internet site
at: http://www.lenovo.com/social_responsibility/us/en/.
EU WEEE statements
EU Only
The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) mark applies only to countries within the European
Union (EU) and Norway. Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for
the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is
applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon
end of life per this Directive.
Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE
Directive must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework
available to them for the return, recycle, recovery of WEEE and minimize any potential effects of EEE on
the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. For additional WEEE
information go to: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.
Battery recycling information for Japan
Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor
If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property
of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of
Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed
of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law
for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and
Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details,
visit the Lenovo Web site at: http://www.lenovo.com/services_warranty/jp/ja/recycle/pcrecycle/.
Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of
home-used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is
provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, visit the Lenovo
Web site at: http://www.lenovo.com/services_warranty/jp/ja/recycle/personal/.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
269
Disposing of a Lenovo computer components
Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other
environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit
board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor.
Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers
A button-shaped lithium battery is installed on the system board of your Lenovo computer to provide power
to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you want to
replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or ask for a repair service provided by Lenovo. If
you have replaced it by yourself and want to dispose of the disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape,
contact your place of purchase, and follow their instructions. If you use a Lenovo computer at home and
need to dispose of a lithium battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations.
Disposing a disused battery pack from Lenovo notebook computers
Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. If
you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery
pack, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions.
You also can refer to the instructions at: http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/.
If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery pack, you
must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:
http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/.
Battery recycling information for Brazil
Declarações de Reciclagem no Brasil
Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso
Equipamentos elétricos e eletrônicos não devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados à pontos de
coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas
especializadas no manuseio de resíduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgãos ambientais, de
acordo com a legislação local.
A Lenovo possui um canal específico para auxiliá-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso você possua
um produto Lenovo em situação de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:
reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, número de série e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instruções
para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo.
Battery recycling information for Taiwan
270
User Guide
Battery recycling information for European Union
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC
concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the
framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the
European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown
away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate
that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also
include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for
cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and
treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential
effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of
hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment
Battery recycling information for United States and Canada
Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements
271
272
User Guide
Appendix C. Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult
your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your
area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service
that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service.
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquiries, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support
applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this
document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document
shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo
or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is
presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary.
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of
the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result
obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been
made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same
on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their
specific environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011
273
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo
Access Connections
Active Protection System
Rescue and Recovery
ThinkLight
ThinkPad
ThinkVantage
TrackPoint
Ultrabay
UltraConnect
UltraNav
Intel and Intel SpeedStep are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Bing, BitLocker, and Internet Explorer are trademarks of the Microsoft
group of companies.
BlackBerry®, RIM®, Research In Motion®, SureType® and related trademarks, names and logos are the
property of Research In Motion Limited and are registered and/or used in the U.S. and countries around the
world. Used under license from Research In Motion Limited.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
274
User Guide
Part Number:
Printed in
(1P) P/N:
**